JP6651490B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine having a movable body, when a malfunction of the movable body is checked by operating the movable body when performing initialization of the movable body, and when it is determined that there is a malfunction, the light emission mode of the lamp is determined. To notify of a problem by changing the setting (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-36514 A

  However, Patent Literature 1 has a problem in that it is simply notified that there is a defect in the movable body, and it is not possible to accurately grasp the defect in the movable object.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately grasping a defect of a movable object.

Of the gaming machine hand stage 1,
A gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A plurality of movable bodies (for example, a first movable body 116SG032L, a second movable body 116SG032R, a third movable body 116SG032U, a fourth movable body 116SG032D);
Movable body control means capable of individually controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the movable body operation presentation as the first movable body 116SG032L, the second movable body 116SG032R, the third movable body 116SG032U, the fourth movable body 116SG032D can be individually operated) and
An operation unit that can be operated,
A special notifying unit that can execute a special notification when the power is turned on after a specific operation has been performed on the operation unit (for example, the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 has been set to “C”). For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs a movable body operation check process or a movable body operation recheck process as a part of the setting changeover switch related process illustrated in FIG.
With
The special notification means, wherein as a special notification, Ri executable der a verifiable notifying whether each of the movable body is operating normally (e.g., the home position of the movable body in the operation check result image "○", "△", "x", etc. are displayed in the fields of sensors and effect position sensors) ,
While the special notification is being performed by the special notification unit, the special notification is terminated when a non-specific operation different from the specific operation is performed on the operation unit, while all the movable bodies are Perform initial operation to position at initial position
It is characterized by:
The gaming machine according to the second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The special notification means performs, as the special notification, a display for sequentially operating each of the movable bodies in a predetermined manner and confirming whether or not each of the movable bodies is operating normally.
It is characterized by:
According to these features, it is possible to grasp whether any movable body is operating normally.

Gaming machine Hand stage 3, a gaming machine according to the means 1 or means 2,
The special notification means can execute notification by displaying a special screen (for example, an operation check result image on the image display device 5) as the special notification, and based on the display of the special screen, By sequentially operating each of the bodies in a predetermined manner, it is possible to confirm whether each of the movable bodies is operating normally or not (for example, as shown in FIG. While displaying the check result image, the operation check of each movable body is executed in order, and "○", "△", "x" are sequentially displayed in the columns of origin position sensor and effect position sensor corresponding to each movable body. Etc.)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which movable body is notified of whether or not it is operating normally on the special screen.

Gaming machine Hand stage 4, a gaming machine according to any of the means 1 to means 3,
A setting operation unit capable of performing a plurality of different settings (for example, changing the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R, shifting to a power saving mode, and checking the operation of each movable body, the push button 31B, the stick controller 31A, and the like) by a setting operation (For example, a setting changeover switch 116SG400),
The special notification unit executes the special notification when a specific setting is set in the setting operation unit when the power is turned on (for example, as shown in Modification 1, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1). A portion for sequentially checking the operation of each movable body based on the fact that the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is set to “C” at the time of the start)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the notification from being inappropriately performed due to the specific setting being performed in the setting operation unit after the startup.

Gaming machine Hand stage 5 is a gaming machine according to the means 4,
Effect execution means capable of executing an effect (for example, a portion in which effect control CPU 120 executes effect control process processing);
An operation unit (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of receiving an operation associated with the effect;
With
The special notification unit sequentially performs a predetermined operation of each of the movable bodies on condition that a specific setting is set in the setting operation unit when power is turned on and a specific operation is received in the operation unit (for example, As shown in the first modification, the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 is set to “C”, and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). (The part for sequentially executing the operation check of each movable body based on the push button 31B being operated a predetermined number of times (for example, five times))
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, even if the specific setting is erroneously set in the setting operation unit when the power is turned on, the movable body can be prevented from performing a predetermined operation.

Gaming machine Hand stage 6 is a gaming machine according to the means 5,
When the predetermined operation is not completed within a predetermined determination period after the start of the predetermined operation, the special notification unit determines that the device is not operating normally and executes the special notification (for example, When the last process timer set in the movable body operation check processing has expired, the origin position sensor or the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be subjected to the operation check is OFF (in the processing of 116SGS251, 116SGS262, 116SGS281). N), it is set in the portion where "△" is displayed in the column of the origin position sensor and the effect position sensor of the movable body to be subjected to the operation check in the operation check result image, and in the movable body operation re-check processing. When the last process timer expires, it corresponds to the movable body to be checked for operation. When the origin position sensor or origin position sensor is OFF (when it is determined to be N in the processing of 116SGS322, 116SGS338, 116SGS351), the origin position sensor and the effect position sensor of the movable body to be operation-checked in the operation check result image Field where "x" is displayed)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to quickly and accurately determine that the device is not operating normally.

Gaming machine Hand stage 7, a gaming machine according to any of the means 4 to unit 6,
The special notification unit is configured to terminate the special notification when the setting in the setting operation unit is changed to a setting different from the specific setting, and to position the movable bodies at the initial position for all the movable bodies. (For example, when it is determined that the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 is set to other than “C” in the processing of the movable body operation check processing 116SGS231 and the movable body operation re-check processing 116SGS301, The part where the control CPU 120 executes the movable body origin return operation processing shown in FIG. 22-14)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, all the movable bodies can be reliably located at the initial position.

Gaming machine Hand stage 8 is a gaming machine according to any of the means 1 to means 7,
The special notification means can execute, as the special notification, notification by displaying a special screen on which whether or not each of the movable bodies is operating normally is simultaneously displayed (for example, in FIG. 22-18). As shown, in the operation check result image, "○", "△", "X", etc. can be displayed simultaneously in the column of origin position sensor and effect position sensor corresponding to each movable body)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it can be quickly confirmed whether or not each of the movable bodies is operating normally.

  It should be noted that the present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, and may have a configuration other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern and a kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of notice effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame opened. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates the production control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various big hits. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern for loss determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control data holding area. It is a front view showing the structure of the 2nd special variable winning prize ball device. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is an explanatory view explaining the display content of the display monitor. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a partial configuration of a storage area in a RAM on a main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a memory map of a CPU on a main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of a main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the item displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display content of the display monitor. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flow chart which shows a part of game control main processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a figure which shows the production mode of a 1st start winning effect and a 2nd start winning effect. It is a figure showing the production mode during variable display. It is a figure showing the production mode during variable display. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an effect mode during variable display in Modification Example 1. It is a figure which shows the production mode during the variable display in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the production mode during the variable display in the modification 2. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a setting change process in a third modification. (A) is an explanatory view showing a display mode of a display monitor in Modification 4, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining a change in display content of the display monitor in Modification 4. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a security cover according to a fifth modification. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for gaming machines in the modification 5. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a security cover according to a sixth modification. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 6. It is an explanatory view showing a pachinko gaming machine in a modification 7. It is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting value conversion process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the conversion method of a setting value into a setting secret value. It is an explanatory view showing a part of display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting value update process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination ratio of a morning one background effect (setting value suggestion effect). It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates the production control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various big hits. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern for loss determination table. It is a flowchart showing a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value confirmation process. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM location processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing information stored in a RAM and a cleared state. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is an explanatory view showing a notification mode at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control process processing. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change process according to a modification 8. It is a flow chart which shows a part of effect control main processing in modification 8. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the image display device according to a modification 8. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the image display device according to a modification 9. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the image display device according to a tenth modification. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates the production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement aspect of each movable body. It is a schematic diagram of an effect control board. It is a figure showing a setting change switch. It is a flowchart showing a game control main process. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change switch related process. It is a flowchart which shows a movable body operation check process. It is a flowchart which shows a movable body operation check process. It is a flowchart which shows a movable body operation re-check process. It is a flowchart which shows a movable body operation re-check process. It is a flowchart which shows a movable body origin return operation | movement process. It is explanatory drawing of the character color of the operation check result image for every pachinko machine type ID. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of operation control at the time of non-detection and operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation speed example of the non-detection operation control and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a figure showing the display mode of an image display device. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the image display device according to a thirteenth modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed so as to be variable (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting prize port that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is Is in the closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is on (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 6B only needs to change between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and a special winning opening as a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball becomes large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is on, the special winning opening door opens the large winning opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol display device 20 is started. In the case where the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 but the general-purpose game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters the start winning opening (winning) during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to a big hitting game state or a small hitting game state (to be described later, the start winning prize is generated. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, the big hit symbol is obtained. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the state is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared. The type has been set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit game state is ended, the time may be controlled to a time saving state or a certain change state depending on the big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time of fluctuating fluctuating time (period of fluctuating fluctuating figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "per-figure hit" in the frug drawing game is improved than in the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, and is therefore an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than that in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

  The time saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. The condition that the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times is an end condition is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). This is a state in which the same control is performed as when the processing is not executed).

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described below. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a determined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state is ended, the state changes to the certain change state. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As a prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later, and various tables) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal) is provided.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass or exit) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start-up switch (first start-up switch 22A and second start-up switch 22B), count switch 23). (Such as a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle enters) and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game state (for example, start and end of variable display, opening state of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, number of storages held, game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating a lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

  The sound output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (Step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a restoration process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after finishing the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  When receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, the start information (start It outputs data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.), probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized. See below).

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process at each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on “per-day drawing” is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of stored holds is executed. When a winning start occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of stored memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of stored memories, and a pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the start winning set thus set is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", or the big hit type in the case of "big hit" Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the special special pattern normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the order of winning the game balls into the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of the winning (also referred to as winning the order).

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting processing, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is used by using a random value for variation pattern determination based on a result of a prior determination as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. And the like are determined. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  The fluctuation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. (Such as the type of reach effect), and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change process includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol change processing ends.

  The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The processing for making the setting is included. If the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “losing”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the time reduction state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit game state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of “big hit” or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set in accordance with, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the opening of the jackpot ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of times of execution of the round for opening the special winning opening has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether or not the hit number has been reached when the upper limit number of times has been reached. And the like for performing a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release processing ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as a staging operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits is a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and the timing of returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the big winning port is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is performed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be disabled. However, when a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, the interrupt is disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read out is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that it is possible to confirm which effect control command has been received and the content specified by the effect control command in the effect control process processing or the like. For example, it turns on a provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S75, an effect control process processing is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative luminous body such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of the camera, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S76 in FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like designating the start of the variable display has been received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect processing in step S172 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Or to drive the movable body 32, to output a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to output a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output are performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of a decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command for designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The waiting process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the small hitting effect process. Also, if the reception waiting time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game was "losing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . In addition, in the small hit effect production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect processing in step S175 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to, for example, receiving a command designating the big hit game state from the main board 11. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize. An enclosed game machine may be used.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and the extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player, If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form that is distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a detachable recording medium. It may be in a form distributed by installing it in a storage device included in it. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “differentiate”) is that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode and the display result is "losing". , The display pattern is a "big hit", such as reach-losing variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "losing". There are prepared the following fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach AE are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that indicates that it is controlled to the big hit state. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B <Super Reach A increases in order. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. In addition, during the super-reach reach effect, an advanced effect that evolves (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves to a super-reach one step higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability. As shown in FIG. 8B, the title notification mode differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and sound. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by the effect devices with the reach of the higher reliability than the reach of the lower reliability. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively fueled, and the effect of the performance is improved. Note that the title notification mode may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the font of the title character (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) or the typeface (line, square, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the effect of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of a rendering operation according to the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. 9 and 10 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect production operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. . Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 9 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 on the “left” and “right” stops and the reach mode is reached. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and a reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses from the start of the super-reach production, such as the end of the introduction part of the super-reach production (also referred to as super-reach production), the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character of “SP Reach A”) is displayed and the sound (here, “Super Reach A”) corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is announced. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (E), the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which characters confront each other is also referred to as a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a friendly character wins, a big hit occurs, and if the friendly character loses, a loss occurs.

  In addition, when the words are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Also, the words are not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach effect is started, such as when the introduction portion of the super reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 9 (F), the title 31AK005 of super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. In this case, the character “SP Reach B” is displayed, and a sound (here, “Super Reach B”) corresponding to the title of Reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach B is notified. You. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is deleted, the character 31AK006, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are confronted as shown in FIG. 9 (G). The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super reach effect or the like is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  In the super reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And the super reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G). In the introductory portion until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9C). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach has been started since the super-reach production started, and which title is to be notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to the completely common production mode until the title is announced, and it is possible to determine at least one of super-reach by watching the production. The sections may have a common effect mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super-reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) may be executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after the super reach can be specified.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character of “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the sound (here, “defeat the enemy”) corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Under the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion indication 31AK008 indicating the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but does not have to completely match the big hit reliability of the reach.

  The notification by the voice of Super Reach D does not report the title name as it is, but reports the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice differs depending on the type of the reach. Thereby, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is announced in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size, for example, in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach effect. Although FIG. 9 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 9 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9 (J), the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. You.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character of “SP Reach E”) is displayed on the upper left part of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Thus, the title of Super Reach E is announced. In the super reach E, the notification of the title by voice is not performed. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is the enemy character, are displayed. Be executed. As described above, in Super Reach E, the title is notified in accordance with the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach E, the title 31AK010 is continuously displayed during the reach effect.

  In the reach production of the super reach E having a low jackpot reliability, by giving the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9D, 9F, and 9F). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Also, in contrast to this embodiment, in a super-reach reach production with a high jackpot reliability, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach effect of the super reach having a low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach effect, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the super reach effect is provided. The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the superreach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production, but the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production in the case of the reach with a high jackpot reliability, and the super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. Is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, title notification is executed in a wider display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits on the entire screen, or the entire background is displayed as a title notification background. (Title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be made different.

(Expectation suggestion indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in the super reach A and the super reach B having the high jackpot reliability, the super reach D having the lower jackpot reliability than the super reach A and the super reach B is displayed without displaying the indication of the expectation. In the title notification in, an indication of the degree of expectation was displayed. By doing so, the effect can be prevented from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, an indication of the degree of expectation is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E.

  Note that the indication of the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 9 (H) and the like. The set numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9 (H) and the like, in the case where the number of black stars is indicated, half (or half) black stars may be displayed, and the number of levels of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, it is possible to pay attention to the reach effect. In the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until a later-described determined effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of the reach can be grasped even during the super reach effect. Further, by performing the above, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in any case in order to improve the effect.

  Note that, here, the production operation of the reach production of the super reach C is omitted, however, for example, a title notification or an expectation suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decided production)
When it is time to derive the display result (the end of the variable display) after each reach effect has been executed, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result will be a "big hit" is executed. The fixed effects include a fixed effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a fixed effect indicating that the display result is “losing”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a fixed effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10C, and a big hit combination is formed as shown in FIG. 10D. A fixed decoration symbol is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the fixed effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and sharp title notification can be executed.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to perform the variable display. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of the symbol may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  In addition, in the case of displaying the characters resident during the hold display, the active display, the variable display, and the display related to the mobile phone on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately not displayed during the super-reach's reach effect in order to focus on the reach effect. It may be. At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as super reach E. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting a low-reliability reach effect, and to focus on the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development stage)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the extended effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the extended effect is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach D is executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is executed), FIG. As shown, an effect is performed in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. Thereafter, when the game reaches the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of the super reach A is announced, and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. When developing to Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11 (D), the title of Super Reach B is announced, and Reach production of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the title of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  It should be noted that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11B, and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sand storm (display indicating failure) is displayed. You may do so. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasses, such as an effect in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 9H, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 is configured to display a black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning. An expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star may be executed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation indicator 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation indicator 31AK021 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation indicator 31AK021 is displayed. An effect that fits into one of the white stars is performed. At this time, a sound of “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed step by step each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted, as shown in FIG. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expected degree suggestion effect has been completed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. However, two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more levels. Alternatively, half black stars may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of displayed stars (the number of stages of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the effect indicating the degree of expectation is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. Regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed and fits in the white star of the indication of expectation, and the number of black stars according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases increases Such an effect may be performed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif displayed on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by a player's operation.

  FIGS. 12 (G) to 12 (L) are examples of the production operation of the title notification and expectation degree suggestion production when the special mode is set when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (F), title notification and expectation degree suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is a reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect form from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation indicator 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound of “pong” indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. When the number of black diamonds corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black diamond is highlighted, as shown in FIG. In this way, by making the notification mode of the title different depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the selection of the player, the game state, and the like, the effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. improves.

  FIG. 12 shows an example of the production operation when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is designated. May be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether to notify the title of the reach or the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the preference of the player, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is indicated by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the degree of expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. May be executed to gradually reduce the number of displays indicating the degree of expectation. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to, or instead of, the expectation effect effect of the present embodiment.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, in the case where the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is announced and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, a button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. An extended effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of super reach C (here, the character of “SP reach C”) is displayed, and The title of Reach C is announced. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the title of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. Under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 having three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. Note that, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect in which the title and the expected degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary production)
In this embodiment, a title announcement for announcing the jackpot reliability is executed as an announcement effect according to the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and a sound corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of Super Reach A. After that, as shown in FIG. 14B, a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. As described above, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 14, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the display of the title.

  When a title notice in which the title display mode (display color) is changed is executed, after the title display mode has been changed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The title notification by voice may be executed after the title display mode (display color) changes. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or an advanced effect, in which the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot advantageous state is improved. By doing in this way, once the title is announced, an effect of increasing the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an announcement effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute an announcement effect and an effect mode. The announcement effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super-reach (whether or not to execute a title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined in accordance with the determination ratio shown in FIG. The display color of the title of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 16A, changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and changes from “black” to “fruit pattern”. There are provided ones that change from "red" to "fruit pattern", and the big hit reliability increases in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of change of the title display color. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

  The “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is a “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area may be a “fruit pattern” . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color that changes, the display color may change after the title notification is executed, as shown in FIG. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes depending on the type of super reach may be made different. In the case of a super reach having a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided, and the changing timing may be determined to any one. Then, in the case of a super reach having a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of timings to be changed may be one or a smaller number than a super reach having a long title display period.

  In the case where there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A in the normal mode. Determine the title display color at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and display color change timing) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the character display mode (for example, the display color of the line) in the super reach reach effect.

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the words of the character in the reach attainment of the super reach (whether or not to execute the speech notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing", for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16 (C), the display color of the lines in the reach effect is changed from “white”, “red”, “white” to “red”, and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the display color of the dialogue changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  In addition, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation mode of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, in the case where the same announcement mode (display color) is included in the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same announcement mode is achieved. In addition, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timing of change of the presentation mode between the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change occurs first. By doing so, it is possible to focus attention on the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined at a different rate from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  Note that, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect in which the reliability of the big hit is foreseen by a change in the effect mode of the reach effect may be executed. In this case, in the notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of another notice effect and the effect form are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (Step AK31S005), and the announcement effect determination process ends.

  Note that in this embodiment, a title advance notice and a dialogue advance notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but in the case of a specific super reach (for example, a super reach with low reliability), the title advance notice is provided. And at least one of dialogue notices may be made executable. In addition, although the title announcement and the speech announcement have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be changed according to the type of super reach. By doing so, a notice effect can be executed according to the type of the reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable effect modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between a title notice and a dialogue notice. By doing in this way, the effects can be varied and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing so, a notice effect with a sense of unity can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
When the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue of the dialogue change, an effect indicating that the presentation mode changes may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an effect effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the line may be changed. The effect mode of the action effect (action effect image and the like) may be common to both the title and the line. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change despite the execution of the action effect. In the case of executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result regarding the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the speech notice changes in the effect mode (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect. The ratio of the effect of the effect and the effect of the line notice (the ratio of the effect) may be different, or the ratio of the color (how many steps) the effect changes may be different. . By executing such an action effect, when the action effect image is displayed, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the line is to be applied, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence or absence of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect mode. By doing in this way, an action effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of a title and a line in accordance with the effect content of the reach effect (for example, an effect of a character or an effect in a battle effect). May be changed. In this way, the player pays attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Here, it is referred to as a sub liquid crystal, but the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or housed. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and display of a hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be executed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is displayed continuously after the notification of the title, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the image display device 5 notifies the title, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the expectation degree suggestion display. By doing so, it is possible to display the title and the indication of the degree of expectation without hindering the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the indication of the degree of expectation are easily understood.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a title of a reach effect as a suggestive effect has been described. You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when performing a look-ahead zone effect of shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, and the like) in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are different, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When a mission ("Let's reach at 7", "Eliminate enemies using a stick controller", etc.) is presented, and a mission effect that is advantageous to the player when the mission is completed is executed, The present invention may be applied to title notification of a mission.

(Variation 1 of characteristic portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a "big hit" is executed, and thereafter, the display result is shown ( (FIG. 10 (B)-(D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving a display result, an operation effect prompting operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect operation in a modification in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after the image display apparatus 5 has reached the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 18 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, an operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is to be executed are prepared. The jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode having higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17E, the praying character 31AK045 changes to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 becomes the large button image 31AK047. Changes to

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and a bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be executed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modified example, when the operation effect image changes, the effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may be different depending on the type of the effect effect.

  Thereafter, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed at the center as shown in FIG. 18 (K). Is displayed to prompt the user to pull the stick controller 31A. At this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 18 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a fixed decoration symbol which is a big hit combination is derived. If no operation is detected within a predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, operation effect images include a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image, and an operation effect using these images in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image is performed. The jackpot reliability is high. Even when an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, the operation effect image may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved and the expectation of the player is improved. Can be maintained.

  In the example of the rendering operation illustrated in FIGS. 17 and 18, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, whether or not there is an effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 31AK)
A suggestion indicating the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state may be displayed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display after the start of the variable display is executed. In the reach title effect, after the reach, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when a reach title is displayed during execution of the reach effect, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <a blue image <a red image <a fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red title reach title). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When the shutter display and the reach title display are performed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such a shutter display and a reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is performed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is performed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 19B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, a super reach effect is started. The variable display is, for example, displayed small in the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Also, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters “Battle Reach” indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of issuing a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability, such as "hot hot", is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the common sound and the specific sound have completely separated output periods has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the character "BATTLE WIN!" Is displayed at the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is over, the display returns to the original variable display screen with the numeric symbols. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. This makes it possible to suitably display the fruit pattern image in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to the overlapping of the execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be performed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. At that time, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 in FIG. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 15 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

(Explanation about the characteristic part of the present embodiment)
Next, features of the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 20A is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 109SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. And an application frame (underframe) 3. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting and firing device and driven into the game area. In addition, the game machine frame 109SG003 has a glass door frame 109SG003a having a glass window between a door opening position for opening the front surface of the game machine frame 109SG003 centering on the left side and a door closing position for closing the front surface. The game area is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 109SG003a. When the glass door frame 109SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 109SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a clerk or the like of a game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. The door frame 109SG003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state housed in a board case 109SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. The main board 11 has a lock switch 109SG051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later, and a lock switch 109SG051 for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) described later in the setting change state. A setting changeover switch 109SG052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

  The setting switch main body provided with a player-operable operation unit such as the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 is housed in the board case 109SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052. Are exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the left side of the back surface of the substrate case 109SG201 so that the operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 109SG201.

  Since the board case 109SG201 having the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG52 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the game machine with the gaming machine frame 109SG003 closed. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 by using it. Further, the lock switch 109SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade, so that only a store clerk having the set key can operate the lock switch 109SG051. The lock switch 109SG051 is also a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation described later and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation) using a setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used.

  Further, a display monitor 109SG029 and a display changeover switch 109SG030 for switching the display of the display monitor 109SG029 are arranged on the board case 109SG201. The display monitor 109SG029 and the display changeover switch 109SG030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged at the upper left of the board case 109SG201. That is, the display monitor 109SG029 and the display changeover switch 109SG030 are arranged on the front of the board case 109SG201 when the main board 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened. This is the front when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-3 and 20-4, the right end of the outer frame 109SG001a is provided on the right side of the board case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed. A security cover 109SG500A that covers the portion from the back side is attached. The security cover 109SG500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 109SG500Aa facing in the front-rear direction, and a long piece 109SG500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 109SG500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is made of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 109SG500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the board case 109SG201. The security cover 109SG500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 109SG001a via the front end of the short piece 109SG500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 20C, the long piece 109SG500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right side of the board case 109SG201 from behind the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed. This covers the right side of the board case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are disabled by the long piece 109SG500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-4, in the state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 move together with the gaming machine frame 109SG003 and move from the long piece 109SG500Ab. By separating, the covering state of the long piece 109SG500Ab is released, and the state becomes operable.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the security cover 109SG500A restricts the operation of the operation unit including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052. In the state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened while the state is maintained, the restriction state by the security cover 109SG500A is released, and the operation of the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 is permitted. State.

  Since the board case 109SG201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed. Unless a store clerk at a game arcade or the like opens the gaming machine frame 109SG003 with a door key, the lock switch 109SG051 or the setting changeover switch 109SG052 cannot be operated to change the set value.

  However, even when the pachinko gaming machine 109SG003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) of the gaming arcade, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 An illegal member such as a wire or a cell board is inserted between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a lock switch 109SG051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is a possibility that the setting value is changed by operating the setting switch 109SG052 or the setting change switch 109SG052. Therefore, the security cover 109SG500A switches the setting switch to the lock switch 109SG051 in a state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed. Restriction on Operation of Operation Unit Including Switch 109SG052 By being maintained state, it is possible to suitably suppress the abuse.

  Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed and the security cover 109SG500A covers the right side of the back surface of the board case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052, the security cover 109SG500A has transparency. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 109SG201 can be seen through, it is possible to easily confirm the status of the mounting surface, sealing seal, and the like of the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (to the right of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 20A). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, an LED (light emitting diode) of a segment or a dot matrix, and is composed of a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) capable of identifying each. A special symbol (also referred to as a “special symbol”) is displayed so as to be variable (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols including numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. I do. In addition, the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numerals indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Instead, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns having different combinations of the ones to be turned on and the ones to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  A symbol number corresponding to each of a plurality of types of special symbols is given. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. .

  Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special map and the type of the second special map may be the same (for example, both numbers indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”), and the type may be different. It may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating “00” to “99”. . In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are illustrated as having a rectangular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. The segments constituting the symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be arranged irregularly.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, for example, three display patterns corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display apparatus 4A and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display apparatus 4B are provided. In a decorative design display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions, a decorative design (also referred to as a production design), which is a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified, is displayed in a variable manner.

  As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, in response to the start of any one of the change of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the change of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special figure game, In the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", the change of the decorative design (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display in the special figure game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) which is the result of the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the variable display using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variable display using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with this, a plurality of types of decorative symbols, each of which is identifiable, are displayed in a variable manner, and a fixed decorative symbol as a result of the variable display is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derived”). Deriving and displaying various display symbols, such as a special symbol and a decoration symbol, means stopping the identification information of the decoration symbol or the like (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and terminating the variable display. . On the other hand, during the fluctuating display from the start of the fancy display of the fancy design to the derivation display of the fancy design which is the fluctuating display result, the fluctuating speed of the fancy design becomes “0”, The design may be stopped and displayed, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking, expansion and contraction, and the like. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitely displayed, the player can recognize that the fluctuation of the decorative symbol by the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. Becomes It should be noted that the temporary stop display may include, for example, completely stopping and displaying the decorative symbol for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second) without causing slight shaking or expansion and contraction.

  For example, nine kinds of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “9” or Chinese characters) Numbers, English characters, nine character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers and characters or symbols and character images, etc., may be a character image, for example, a person or animal, an object other than these, or , A symbol such as a character, or any other decorative image indicating an arbitrary figure). Each of the decorative symbols is assigned a corresponding symbol number. For example, symbol numbers "1" to "9" are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating "1" to "9", respectively. The number of decorative patterns is not limited to nine, but may be any number (for example, eight or ten) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a lossy combination can be configured.

  After the decoration display of the decorative symbol is started, until the determined decorative symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed, each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the display, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers sequentially flow from upper to lower, from small to large, and the decorative symbol having the maximum symbol number (eg, “9”) is displayed. Thus, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, etc.), scroll display is performed from a symbol with a larger symbol number to a symbol with a smaller symbol number. When the decorative symbol with the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol with the largest symbol number may be subsequently displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a first hold storage display area 109SG005D and a second hold storage display area 109SG005U are arranged. An active display area 109SG005F for displaying the hold display corresponding to the storage as the active display is displayed. Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol is such that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A or the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) Is generated based on the start winning. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display based on the previously established start condition is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine When the start condition allowing the start of the variable display is not satisfied due to, for example, the control of the large hit game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. The hold display in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D is a hold display generated based on a winning start by a game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, and is a hold display in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U. Is a hold display generated on the basis of the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening.

  In particular, the first hold storage display area 109SG005D of the present embodiment displays a hold 1 display position for displaying the first first special figure hold display from the bottom upward and a second first special figure hold display. The hold 2 display position to be displayed, the hold 3 display position to display the third first special figure hold display, and the hold 4 display position to display the fourth first special figure hold display are arranged side by side. The display can be displayed.

  Further, a character image 109SGC is displayed above the first hold storage display area 109SG005D in the image display device 5 (see FIGS. 20 to 27). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the hold display moves from the character image 109SGC to the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the active display area 109SG005F due to occurrence of a new start winning, as will be described in detail later. Start winning prize production can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the hold display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening is a round white display (hold displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D). And a hold display generated on the basis of the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening is a circular white display (hold storage displayed in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U). Display). In addition, based on the hold display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and based on the starting winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The display mode of the generated hold display may be different from the display mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20A, the number of special figure reserved storages is displayed above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 109SG005U. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided for displaying the information in a identifiable manner. The first reservation display 25A displays the first special figure reservation storage number in a identifiable manner. The second reservation display 25B displays the second special figure reservation storage number in a identifiable manner. The first special figure reserved storage number is the number of storages in which the execution of the variable display using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure reserved storage number is the number of storages in which the execution of the variable display using the second special figure is suspended. In particular, the number of suspended storages in the variable display obtained by adding the first special figure suspended storage number and the second special figure suspended storage number is also referred to as a total suspended storage number. When simply referred to as “the number of special figure reserved storages”, it generally refers to a concept including any of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number. (The concept includes the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number, but excludes the total reserved storage number).

  On the left and right sides of the image display device 5, general winning ports 109SG050A and 109SG050D are provided, and in a region below the general winning port 109SG050A, general winning ports 109SG050B and 109SG050C are provided. Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The variable winning prize ball device 6B uses a solenoid 109SG081 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 20-2 to set the normal open state (see the solid line position in FIG. 20-1) and the tilt position (see FIG. 20-1). (Refer to a dotted line position), and an ordinary motorized accessory having a movable wing piece that changes to an enlarged open state, which forms a second starting winning opening.

  As an example, in the variable winning prize ball device 6B, when the solenoid 109SG081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the variable winning prize ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 109SG081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the ON state. ) It becomes an expanded open state that is easy to perform. Note that, even when the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in the normally open state, although the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening, it is less likely that the gaming ball enters than in the enlarged opening state. You may comprise so that it may become. Alternatively, the variable winning prize ball device 6B may be configured such that, in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning port, the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area has an enlarged open state in which the game balls easily pass (enter), and a normal open state in which the game balls hardly pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting switch 22A shown in FIG. 20-2. A game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 20-2. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved storage number becomes a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4)) If it is less than or equal to, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved storage number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4)) If not, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of a game ball by the first starting port switch 22A and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of a game ball by the second starting port switch 22B May be the same number or different numbers.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the general winning opening 109SG050A, 109SG050B, 109SG050C, 109SG050D is a first general winning opening switch 109SG026A, a second general winning opening switch 109SG026B, and a third general winning opening switch shown in FIG. 109SG026C and the fourth general winning opening switch 109SG026D are detected, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

  A special variable winning ball unit 109SG007 in which a first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A and a second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B are integrated is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Here, the configuration of the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007 will be described. In the following description, the description will be made with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, in the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007, the left side constitutes a first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, and the right side constitutes a second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B. A cover (not shown) made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007, and the player can use the special variable winning ball unit via the cover. A game ball flowing down in the 109SG007, in particular, the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B can be visually recognized.

  The first special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007A includes a first special winning opening door 109SG701 driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 109SG082 (see FIG. 20B), and is opened and closed by the first special winning opening door 109SG701. A changing first winning combination is formed. The first big winning opening is formed to open upward at the left side of the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007. The first special winning opening door 109SG701 is slidable in the front-rear direction between a closed position for closing the first special winning opening by driving the solenoid 109SG082 and an open position for opening the first special winning opening. ing.

  In the first special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007A, when the solenoid 109SG082 is on, the first special winning opening door 109SG701 opens the first special winning opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the first special winning opening. Make it easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 109SG082 is in the off state, the first special winning opening door 109SG701 closes the first special winning opening, so that the game ball cannot pass (enter) the first special winning opening. As described above, the first big winning opening changes to an open state which is advantageous for a player who can easily pass (enter) the game ball, and a closed state which is disadvantageous for the player because the game ball cannot pass (enter). In addition, in place of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) the first big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state where the game ball hardly passes (enter) the first big winning opening is provided. You may.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the first special winning opening is detected by the first count switch 109SG023 by passing through the first count switch 109SG023 (see FIG. 20-2) provided in the first special winning opening. Is done. The game ball that has passed through the first count switch 109SG023 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Based on the detection of a game ball by the first count switch 109SG023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the first special winning opening that has been opened in the first special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007A, other winning openings, such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, are set. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, when the first special winning opening is opened in the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, the game ball can enter the first special winning opening, and the first state is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the first special winning opening is closed in the first special variable winning prize device 109SG007A, it is impossible or difficult to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) a game ball into the first special winning opening. And the second state is disadvantageous for the player.

  In addition, most of the game balls that have flowed down without entering the first special winning opening are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B by an unillustrated nail or the like. Winners are to be awarded.

  The second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B shown in FIG. 20-14 is formed to protrude upward from the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, and is driven to open and close by a solenoid 109SG083 (see FIG. 20-2). The second large winning opening door 109SG711 forms a second large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. The second special winning opening is formed to open upward at the upper end of the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B. The second special winning opening door 109SG711 switches between a first state (open state) in which the second special winning opening is opened by driving the solenoid 109SG083 and a second state (closed state) in which the second special winning opening is closed. It is provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction.

  In the second special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007B, when the solenoid 109SG083 for the second special winning opening door 109SG711 is in the ON state, the second special winning opening door 109SG711 opens the second special winning opening, and the game ball is in the second position. Make it easy to pass (enter) the two major winning openings. On the other hand, when the solenoid 109SG083 for the second special winning opening door 109SG711 is in the off state, the second special winning opening door 109SG711 closes the second special winning opening, and the game ball passes through the second special winning opening. (Enter) can not be. In this way, the second big winning opening changes between an open state in which the game balls easily pass (enter), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game balls cannot pass (enter), which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball hardly passes (enter) the second big winning opening is provided. You may.

  A game ball passing through (entering) the second special winning opening is detected by the inside of the second count switch 109SG024A by passing through the second count switch 109SG024A installed in the second special winning opening shown in FIG. 20-14. Is done. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch 109SG024A, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes through (enters) the second large winning opening that has been opened in the second special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007B, another normal winning, such as a first starting winning opening or a second starting winning opening, is provided. More prize balls are paid out than when game balls pass (enter) the mouth. Therefore, when the second special winning opening is opened in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, the game ball can enter the second special winning opening, and the first state is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the second special winning opening is closed in the second special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007B, it is impossible or difficult to pass (enter) a game ball to the second special winning opening to obtain a prize ball. And the second state is disadvantageous for the player.

  As shown in FIG. 20-14, in the second special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007B, there is formed a game ball flow path 109SG750 through which game balls having passed through the second big winning port can flow. The game ball flow path 109SG750 includes a main path 109SG740 (a region along the solid line in FIG. 20-14) through which the game ball that has passed through the second winning port and a branch path 109SG741 branching from the main path 109SG740 (FIG. 20-). 14 area along the dotted line). A backflow prevention member 109SG730 described later is provided between the main path 109SG740 and the branch path 109SG741. Further, on the upstream side of the backflow prevention member 109SG730 in the main path 109SG740, a first branch portion 109SG742 in which the branch path 109SG741 branches from the main path 109SG740 is provided. , A second branching unit 109SG743 for branching the branching path 109SG741 from the main path 109SG740. That is, a game ball flowing down the main route 109SG740 can be moved from the first branch 109SG742 or the second branch 109SG743 to the branch 109SG741 side.

  A third count switch 109SG024B, through which a game ball can pass, is provided at the most downstream portion of the main path 109SG740. The game ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B, and is thereby controlled by the third count switch 109SG024B. Is detected. The game ball that has passed through the third count switch 109SG024B is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. The game ball that has reached the most downstream portion of the branch path 109SG741 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2 and passes through the fourth count switch 109SG024C. , Is detected by the fourth count switch 109SG024C.

  In the present embodiment, the game state after the end of the small hitting game is controlled to the big hitting game state based on the detection of the game ball by the third count switch 109SG024B during the small hitting game described later. I have. Therefore, during the period in which the second big winning opening door 109SG711 is opened during the small hit game, the course of the game ball is changed by adding vibration or the like, and the game ball is detected by the third count switch 109SG024B. In such a case, it becomes possible for the player to be controlled to a jackpot game state which is advantageous to the player, and thus the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment stops the game in such a case.

  On the downstream side of the first branch portion 109SG742 in the main route 109SG740, a regulating member 109SG721 for regulating and allowing the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch 109SG024B is provided. The regulating member 109SG721 projects into the main path 109SG740 by driving the solenoid 109SG085 (see FIG. 20-2), thereby restricting the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch 109SG024B in the main path 109SG740. It is slidably provided in the front-rear direction between a main ball 109SG740 and a permissible state in which the ball is allowed to flow down to the third count switch 109SG024B in the main channel 109SG740 by retreating from the main channel 109SG740.

  The upper part of the regulating member 109SG721 is formed as a flat surface, and the flat surface is provided in the main path 109SG740 so as to form a predetermined angle downward toward the branch path 109SG741 in a front view. . For this reason, when a game ball flows down the main path 109SG740 while the regulation member 109SG721 is in the regulation state, the game ball passes through the second branch portion 109SG743 along a flat surface formed above the regulation member 109SG721. It is guided so as to flow down to the branch path 109SG741 via the route.

  A backflow prevention member 109SG730 is pivotably supported between the main path 109SG740 and the branch path 109SG741 by a pivot pointed in the front-rear direction. The backflow prevention member 109SG730 is a plate-shaped member whose upper end is pivotally supported by a pivot. When the game ball guided by the flat surface of the regulating member 109SG721 comes into contact with the main path 109SG740, the branch path starts from the main path 109SG740. It can be moved (rotated) so that it can pass to the 109SG741 side. Specifically, it is rotatable between an allowable position where the main path 109SG740 and the branch path 109SG741 are inclined to open, and a restricted position where the main path 109SG740 and the branch path 109SG741 are closed. Is provided. A rib 109SG801 projecting forward is provided above the regulating member 109SG721, and the backflow prevention member 109SG730 comes into contact with the rib 109SG801 in the regulating position in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  Note that the backflow prevention member 109SG730 is normally arranged at a restriction position by its own weight, and in this restriction position, a game ball guided on a flat surface comes into contact with the main path 109SG740 side (right side in front view). The ball is pushed by the game ball and rotates clockwise in front view with the allowable position as an upper limit.

  At this time, the vertical width between the tip of the backflow prevention member 109SG730 and the lower portion of the second branch 109SG743 changes to be shorter than the diameter of the game ball, and the main path in which the third count switch 109SG024B is provided. The movement of the game ball from the 109SG740 side to the branch path 109SG741 side where the fourth count switch 109SG024C is provided is allowed. On the other hand, when the backflow prevention member 109SG730 is at the restriction position, even if the game ball abuts from the branch path 109SG741 side (left side in front view), the backflow prevention member 109SG730 abuts on the rib 109SG801 to prevent backflow. The rotation of the member 109SG730 in the counterclockwise direction is restricted. At this time, since the width between the tip of the backflow prevention member 109SG730 and the lower part of the second branch 109SG743 is kept shorter than the diameter of the game ball, the fourth count switch 109SG024C is provided. The movement of the game ball from the branch path 109SG741 side to the main path 109SG740 side provided with the third count switch 109SG024B is reliably restricted.

  Returning to FIG. 20A, a normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 20A, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment or dot-matrix LED or the like similarly to the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Is displayed (variable display) so as to be variable.

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose reserved storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 109SG041. The passing gate 109SG041 is provided between the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B in the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007. It should be noted that a gate switch 21 to be described later is built in the passing gate 109SG041.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. Further, a winning opening other than the above winning openings may be provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, and a gaming effect lamp 9 is provided around the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the resilience of a game ball in accordance with the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by a player or the like. The hitting operation handle may be provided with a single-shot firing switch for stopping driving of a firing motor included in the hitting ball firing device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball firing device (reservation). ) Is provided. A lower plate is provided below the gaming machine frame 109SG003 to retain (retain) excess balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so as to be able to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate) is attached to the lower plate member that forms the lower plate. ing. The upper plate member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B at which a player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate main body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the game area is divided into a left game area on the left side and a right game area on the right side of the center decoration frame surrounding the image display device 5 disposed at a substantially central position of the game area. The game ball that has been weakly hit (left hit) by the hit ball operating handle flows down the first path (left game area), and the game ball that has been hit hard (right hit) by the hit ball operating handle is on the second path ( (The right game area).

  Also, the game balls flowing down the first route can be won in the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the game balls flowing down the second route can be won in the variable winning ball device 6B and the first special variable winning ball device. A large number of obstacle nails are provided so that the player can win a prize in the 109SG007A and the second special variable prize ball device 109SG007B and can pass through the passing gate 109SG041. In other words, in the case of left-handing, the first special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007A and the second special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007B cannot be won, and cannot pass through the passing gate 109SG041.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display unit 20 displays a variation display of the ordinary symbol such that the game ball passing through the passing gate 109SG041 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general-figure start condition for execution is satisfied, the normal-figure start condition for starting the normal graphic fluctuating display, such as the end of the previous general-figure fluctuation display, is established. The fluctuation display of the ordinary figure by the symbol display 20 is started.

  In the variation display of the ordinary symbol, after a variation of the ordinary symbol is started, when a predetermined time which is the variation time of the ordinary symbol elapses, the fixed ordinary symbol which is the variation display result of the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variation display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “a symbol per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a fixed symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a numeral or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed symbol, the variation display result of the symbol is “Pull”. Become. In response to the normal symbol change display result being “per-figure”, enlarged opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing of the electric tulip constituting the variable prize ball device 6B is at the tilt position. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  After the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. For example, the variable display of the special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit game state, or the like. The second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting port switch 22B shown in FIG. 20-2. After that, the second special symbol display device 4B starts the variable display of the special figure based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the previous variable display of the special figure or the end of the big hit game state. .

  In the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable symbol display time is started after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol is changed. Derived and displayed a fixed special symbol (variable display result) to be a variable display result. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, the special display result becomes "big hit", and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, a "small hit" is obtained as a predetermined display result. Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, "losing" is obtained.

  After the fluctuation display result in the special figure fluctuation display becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to a big hit gaming state as a specific game state in which a round (also called “round game”) that is advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times. You. After the fluctuation display result in the special figure fluctuation display becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the number of “3”, “5”, and “7” is a large hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating the number of “2” is a small hit symbol. , A special symbol indicating the symbol “-” is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the variable display of the special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. It may be designed to be a symbol, or a common special symbol may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol in the variable display of both special figures.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the change display of the special figure and becomes the "big hit" as the specific display result, in the big hit game state, the first big winning opening door of the first special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007A. The 109SG 701 opens the first big winning opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated. As a result, a round is executed in which the first special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007A is placed in a first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

  The round, which is the opening cycle of the first winning port, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15”, “10”, “5”, etc.). Even before the number of times of execution of the round reaches the upper limit number, the execution of the round is terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball does not win in the first big winning opening). Is also good.

  In addition, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special display change display and becomes the “small hit” as the specific display result, the second special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007B in the small hit game state is displayed. The second winning port door 109SG711 opens the second winning port in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated. State. As a result, the second special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007B enters a first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the small hitting game state, the second big winning opening door 109SG711 is set to be opened once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be opened a plurality of times in the small hitting game state.

  In the small hitting game state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening passes through the third count switch 109SG024B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, the game ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B. (Big prize jackpot) based on the prize. That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the big hitting gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the gaming ball through the third count switch 109SG024B. On the other hand, if the game ball that has won the second big winning opening in the small hitting game state passes through the fourth count switch 109SG024C provided in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, the "big hit" does not occur. That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the gaming ball through the fourth count switch 109SG024C.

  When the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the passing of the third count switch 109SG024B, the second special winning opening door 109SG711 of the second special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007B is set to a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds). ), Or the period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the second large winning opening is opened. Thus, a round game in which the second special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007B is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player is executed. In the present embodiment, the second special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007B is controlled to the first state when it is controlled to the big hit game state based on the passage of the third count switch 109SG024B. The present invention is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007A may be controlled to the first state.

  The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or “5”). It should be noted that even before the number of round game executions reaches the upper limit number, the round game may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball does not win the second big winning opening). Good.

  After the big hitting game state according to the present embodiment is completed, a time-saving state in which the time-saving control (time-saving control) is performed in a predetermined range of the number of changes (for example, 100 times or 20 times), and a time-saving control are performed. Not controlled either in normal state. By performing the time saving control, the variable display time (variable display time) in the variable display of the special figure is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a jackpot game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). The same control is performed as in the state in which is executed. The time-saving control is that after the big hitting game state ends, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times or 20 times) of the fluctuation display of the special figure is executed, the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit”, and in the small hitting game state. The process may be terminated when any one of the conditions that the game ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B is satisfied first.

  When the time saving control is performed, the control is performed such that the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is shorter than that in the normal state. The control for shortening the fluctuation time (floor fluctuation time) of the fluctuating display of the general figure by the symbol display 20 or the fluctuation display result in the fluctuating display of the general figure of each time is "per-figure hit". When the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable wing piece in the variable prize ball device 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per-figure” is set in the normal state, The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second starting winning opening, such as the control for increasing the length of the game, or the control for increasing the number of times of tilting than in the normal state, thereby increasing the possibility that the second starting condition is satisfied. Player at Advantageous to become control is performed taking. As described above, the control that is advantageous to the player by making it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening with the time saving control is also referred to as high opening control. As the high release control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all controls) may be performed in combination.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the enlarged opening state is increased as compared to when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the variable display of the special figure can be frequently executed. Then, the time until the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” or “small hit” is reduced. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed. A game state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has various components such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a terminal board (information output board) 16, and a power supply board 17 as shown in FIG. Control board is mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also provided with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 20C, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 109SG201, and progresses the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a function of setting a random number used in the special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 controls the lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The display of the variation of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variation display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by performing lighting / off / coloring control of the ordinary symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-3 and 20-15 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 109SG029 visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 109SG029 is It also has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. Note that a display changeover switch 109SG030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 109SG029, and information displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 109SG030.

  As shown in FIG. 20B, the main board 11 has a door opening sensor 109SG090 that detects the opening of the glass door frame 109SG003a that covers the front of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the opening of the first big winning opening door 109SG701. Various sensors, such as a first winning opening door sensor 109SG091 for detecting the opening of the second winning opening door 109SG711 and a second winning opening door sensor 109SG092 for detecting the opening of the second winning opening door 109SG711, are connected. It also has a function of determining the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on the detection signal output from the sensor.

  The main board 11 captures various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting game balls, and the like. A switch circuit 110 for transmitting to the solenoid 100; an output circuit 109SG111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoids 109SG081-83; and information output for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 109SG016. A circuit 109SG112 is mounted.

  The main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 20B is sealed in a substrate case 109SG201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material as shown in FIGS. 20-3 and 20-15 (A). A display monitor 109SG029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged at the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 109SG030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 109SG029. The display monitor 109SG029 and the display changeover switch 109SG030 are arranged on the front when the main board 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened. This is the front when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  In addition, the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) is provided with each winning opening (first winning opening, second winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning). Mouth, hereinafter also referred to as “entry area”), the number of game balls entering the game area is counted, and various winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning ratio based on the count is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. By displaying these prize information, various prize information such as the connection ratio and the winning combination after installation in the game hall can be confirmed. In other words, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the game board surface is designed so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). When the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed.

  Note that the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 109SG003 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only a clerk having a predetermined key can operate. Further, since the lock switch 109SG051 requires key operation, only the clerk of the game store that has a key for operating the lock switch 109SG051 can be operated. The lock switch 109SG051 is a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation using a predetermined key, and is also a switch that can execute an operation (for example, a pressing operation) different from the switching operation.

  As shown in FIG. 20-3, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided for discharging the gaming balls that have won each winning opening and the gaming balls that have entered the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 109SG070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 109SG070 is connected to the above-described switch circuit 110 as shown in FIG.

  The output circuit 109SG111 is also connected to a controller 109SG084 for driving the solenoid 109SG085. The controller 109SG084 starts driving control of the solenoid 109SG085 by receiving an activation signal from the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 109SG111 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. When the controller 109SG084 drives the solenoid 109SG085, the regulating member 109SG721 repeats the regulating state and the permissible state every second regardless of the gaming state.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 And an LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 20-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 20-5 (A) is an example, and another command form may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), a determination result of whether the variation display result is “losing”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ), And different EXT data are set according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types of the jackpot is to be used when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” (big hit type determination result).

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “losing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit A”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit B”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , Time-saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the generated error (abnormal). In the error (abnormal) designation command, for example, the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormal) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormal) has been determined to have occurred on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening, which notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening and the notification command after opening of the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified in the second reserved storage display area 109SG005U or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  The command D100 is a V-prize notification designation command for notifying that a V-prize has been achieved, that is, that the third count switch 109SG024B has been turned on when a game ball has passed the third count switch 109SG024B.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 103. It comprises a random number circuit 104 for performing, an input / output port (I / O) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes and temporarily stores various variable data in the RAM 102, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 Reading operation, CPU 103 receiving an input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, CPU 103 outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  FIG. 20D is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 20-6, in this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value for determining the variation pattern, on the main substrate 11 side. Numerical data indicating each of the numerical value MR3, the random number value MR4 for determining the ordinary figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 by software update using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 20-6, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 20-7 shows a variation pattern according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the fluctuation display result is “losing”, the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is “big hit”. In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a “non-reach loss fluctuation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in a loss variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variation display result is “loss”. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

  The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 20-7, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the present embodiment is executed is set to be shorter than the super reach variation patterns, super reach α and super reach β. Have been. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super-reach variation pattern in which the super-reach effect such as super-reach α and super-reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super-reach effect of super-reach β is executed is The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach are set so that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” so that the big hit expectation becomes higher. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of the big hit.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first by determining the types of the fluctuation patterns, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, and the type of super reach. and from, rather than determining the variation pattern to run from fluctuation patterns belonging to the type that the determined, so as to determine using only random numbers MR3 for variation pattern determined without determining these types However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random number value for determining the variation pattern type is provided. after previously determined the type of variation patterns from figures may be determined variation pattern that run from fluctuation patterns belonging to the type that the determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-7, an example is described in which the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of the variation (the effect content) may be different depending on the set value that has been set. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern becomes the normal reach loss, and when the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the set value is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and the non-reach is lost, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed three times and the variation pattern becomes the super reach loss.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to a game control program, various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-8 and 20-9 and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various types of determinations and decisions. Further, the ROM 101 has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. And a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 20-8 (A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 20-8 (B), and FIG. -20 (C), a display result determination table (set value 3), a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 20-9 (A), and a big hit type determination shown in FIG. 20-9 (B). 20-9 (C), a large hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), a small hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), a loss variation pattern A determination table (not shown), a general-purpose display result determination table (not illustrated), a general-purpose variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), and the like are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (winning rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to a set value, a winning probability (winning rate) of a big hit and a small hit is changed. Has become. The set value has three stages of 1 to 3, 1 is the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreases as the value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3, the advantage gradually decreases.

  FIGS. 20A to 20C are explanatory diagrams illustrating display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each of the display result determination tables, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subjected to the variable display, and the case where the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, a determination value for a large hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, the variable special figure designating buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If the set value is "2" or "3", the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/99) than when the set values are "2" and "3", and a part of these judgment values corresponds to the small hit. By being set as the determination value to be determined, the small hit is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the set value is “2” or “3”. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, even if the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, the same probability (1/99) as a big hit is won, and half of these judgment values are By being set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, the small hit is won with a higher probability (100/200) than in the case where the first special symbol is subjected to the variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-8 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/150) than in a certain case, and a part of these determination values is set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, so that the set value is “1”. The small hit is won with a lower probability (1/99) than in the case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/150) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and half of these judgment values are By being set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and the same probability as when the set value is “1”. (100/200) wins a small hit.

  As shown in FIG. 20C, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set. However, when the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not set, and thus the set value is “1” or “2” when the first special symbol is a target of the variable display. The big hit is won with a lower probability (1/200), but the small hit is not won (winning probability: 0). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, even if the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, the same probability (1/200) is won as the big hit, and half of these judgment values are Since the first special symbol is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is subjected to the variable display, and the set values are “1” and “2”. The small probability is won with the same probability (100/200) as in the case.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches the hit determination value, the special symbol is determined to be a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). If MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 20-8 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 20-8 (A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to a big hit gaming state, but to determine whether to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hitting game state. However, stopping in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol.

  In the present embodiment, in each of the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 20A to 20C, the winning probability per small hit is the same when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second. However, the winning probability of a small hit may be reduced in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is reduced in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3, but the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second. Alternatively, the winning probability may be the same for all set values.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-8 (A) to (C). The big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are provided separately, and the big hit determination is made depending on whether the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display are performed regardless of the variation special figure designation buffer. The determination may be made using a common table, and the small hit determination may be made using separate tables for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first buffer and the case where the buffer is the second.

  In the present embodiment, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 20-8 (C) is used, the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit is used. Is not set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit was not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit corresponds to the small hit. It may be set as a judgment value, and the small hit may be won. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

  In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as settable values for the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

  20A and 20B are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 20-9 (A) determines the big hit type by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table in the case of doing. Further, FIG. 20-9 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

  The big hit type determination table indicates that the type of the big hit is one of the big hits A to C based on the hit type determining random number (MR2) when it is determined that the variation display result is a big hit symbol. Is a table referred to in order to determine

  FIG. 20C is an explanatory diagram of the small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table indicates that the type of the small hit is a small hit A or a small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for the hit type determination when the variation display result is determined to be a small hit symbol. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine. In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type of the big hit D is executed. If the game ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, if a V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type of the big hit E is executed. Is to be done. That is, the big hit D and the big hit E are not the big hit type determined by the random number value MR2 for judging the hit type extracted at the time of the start winning, but the game ball during the small hit game of the small hit A and the small hit B. Is a jackpot type determined based on whether or not has passed the third count switch 109SG024B.

  Here, the jackpot types in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20-10. In the present embodiment, the jackpots A and D in which the time-saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are described as the jackpot types. A big hit B, a big hit C, and a big hit E in which the time-saving control is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state are set. In other words, of these jackpots A to E, the jackpots C and E are determined to be the most advantageous jackpots for the player, and the jackpots A and D are determined to be the most disadvantageous jackpots for the player. Also, since the big hit E is a big hit which is more advantageous than the big hit D, the small hit B is a small hit which is more advantageous than the small hit A.

  Among these jackpots A to E, the jackpot A is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the first winning port to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hitting game state of the big hit A, the time-saving control is not executed.

  The big hit B is a big hit that is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called ten rounds) for changing the first big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit game state of the big hit B is completed, the time-saving control is executed until the big hit occurs again until the 20 special figure games are executed or the 20 special figure games are executed.

  The big hit C is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the first big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit game state of the big hit C is completed, the time-saving control is executed until the big hit occurs again until 100 special figure games are executed or 100 special figure games are executed.

  The big hit D is a big hit that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) for changing the second big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Also, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit D, the time-saving control is not executed.

  The big hit E is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) to change the second big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit game state of the big hit E ends, the time-saving control is executed until the big hit occurs again until 100 special figure games are executed or 100 special figure games are executed.

  The jackpot D and the jackpot E have the second jackpot 109SG712 as the opening jackpot to be opened. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be the first big winning opening. That is, for the big hit D and the big hit E, the second big winning opening 109SG712 is opened for the small hitting game, and based on the fact that the V winning is generated during the small hitting game, the second big winning opening 109SG712 is set as the big hit game. The first big winning opening may be opened instead.

  In the time reduction state, a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state due to an increase in the probability of the “normal drawing hit”. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and a big hit may occur when the game ball wins V during the small hit game. The state is a so-called extended state that is likely to occur continuously without going through the state.

  In the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B, the number of special figure games for which the time saving control is executed is set to 20, so that a small hit occurs during the 20 special figure games, The rate at which the ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B (the rate at which the gaming ball wins V during the 20 special figure games and a big hit occurs) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, since the number of special figure games for which the time saving control is executed is set to 100, a small hit occurs during the 100 special figure games. The rate at which the game balls pass through the third count switch 109SG024B (the rate at which the game balls win V during the 100 special figure games and a big hit occurs) is set to approximately 100%.

  In the present embodiment, five types of jackpots A to E are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided. Also, four or less types may be provided.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 20A, in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the MR2 has a determination value range of 0 to 299. 0 to 49 are assigned to the jackpot A, 50 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B, 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Also, when the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 149 is assigned to the big hit A, and 150 to 249 is assigned to the big hit B, 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit B or the big hit C at which the time-saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game decreases in order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. I am trying to become.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the MR2 determination value is in the range of 0 to 299. , 0 to 29 are assigned to jackpot A, 30 to 99 are assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 69 is assigned to the big hit A, and 70 to 269 is assigned to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. Also, when the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 199 are assigned to the big hit A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hits B and C at which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is determined in the special figure game of the first special symbol. Is higher than in the case where has occurred, and decreases in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, as shown in FIGS. 20-9 (A) and 20-9 (B), the big hit type is determined to be big hit C. The ratio is the highest, then the ratio determined to the jackpot B is high, and the ratio determined to the jackpot A is the lowest (the jackpot type determination ratio at the set value 1: the jackpot C> the jackpot B> the jackpot A). If the set value is 2, the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot B with the highest determination ratio, then the jackpot A is determined to be higher, and the jackpot C is determined to be the lowest (set value). Jackpot type determination ratio in 2: jackpot B> jackpot A> jackpot C). Furthermore, when the set value is 3, the rate of determining the jackpot type to be the big hit A is the highest, then the rate of the big hit B is high, and the rate of the big hit C is the lowest. (Small jackpot type determination ratio at set value 3: big jackpot A> big jackpot B> big jackpot C).

  Note that, in the present embodiment, an example is described in which the type of the big hit in the case where the variable display result is a big hit is determined at a different ratio from the big hit A, the big hit B, and the big hit C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be one or more jackpot types that have not been determined among the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C depending on the set values. In other words, the difference in the jackpot type determination ratio depending on the set value that has been set means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific jackpot type is 100%. Deciding on a percentage is included.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20C, in the small hit type determination table, when the set value is “1”, out of the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are small. The hit A is assigned, and 100 to 299 is assigned to the small hit B. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hit A, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. I have. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 199 are assigned to the small hits A and 200 to 299 are assigned to the small hits B in the range of the determination values of MR2 0 to 299. I have.

  In this way, when the V winning big hit occurs during the small hit game, the rate of determining the big hit E in which the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is 100 is 20 times. It is configured to be higher than the ratio for determining the big hit D and to be lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20C, when the set value is 1, the small hit B is set at a higher rate than the small hit A as the small hit type. By being determined, the rate at which the big hit type is determined to be the big hit E based on the occurrence of the V winning during the small hit game is higher than the rate at which the big hit is determined to be the big hit D (V at the set value 1). Jackpot type determination ratio by winning: jackpot E> jackpot D). When the set value is 2, the small hits A and the small hits B are determined at the same ratio as the small hit types, so that the V prize occurs during the small hit game. The rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot D is equal to the rate determined to be the jackpot E based on the above (the jackpot type determination rate due to the V prize at the set value 2: the jackpot E = the jackpot D). Further, if the set value is 3, the small hit A is determined as a small hit type at a higher ratio than the small hit B, so that the V prize is generated during the small hit game. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot D is higher than the rate at which the jackpot is determined to be the jackpot E (the jackpot type determination rate by the V prize at the set value 1: the jackpot D> the jackpot E).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination rate of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a big hit and the determination rate of the big hit type when the V prize occurs according to the set value are different. That is, the type of the small hitting game state controlled according to the set value that has been set may change, and the type of the big hitting game state controlled when the V winning occurs may change. , It is possible to improve the entertainment interest.

  In the present embodiment, the determination rate of the small hit type is different depending on the set value that is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, There may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hits A and the small hits B. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the small hit type differs depending on the set value that is set means that one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type is determined. The determination of the type at a rate of 100% is also included. Further, in the present embodiment, an example is described in which the small hit type is determined using the common small hit type determination table regardless of whether the variation special map is the first special map or the second special map. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. When the small hit type is determined at a different rate according to the fluctuation special map, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B depending on the fluctuation special map. That is, in order to determine the small hit type at a different ratio according to the variation special figure, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type is determined. This includes determining at a rate of 100%.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit type and the small hit type are determined by using the random number value MR2 for the big hit type determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the hit types may be determined by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous to the player (the bigger hit probability and the smaller hit probability are increased, and the big hit C and the big hit type as the big hit type are increased). Although the form in which the small hits B are easily determined is exemplified), the present invention is not limited to this, and the greater the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous to the player. You may do so.

  Also, in the present embodiment, while the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 20-10 to FIG. Although the form in which the character itself does not change is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game characteristic may change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is set to a gaming property (a so-called probability variation loop type) in which the probability variation state loops at a rate of 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B during the jackpot game. While the game state after the end is controlled to the certainty change state, the pachinko game has a playability (a so-called V certainty change type) in which the ratio of the game balls passing through the third count switch 109SG024B during the big hit game differs according to the fluctuation special figure. When the set value set in the machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is performed during the high base (during the time saving control). There may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing through the third count switch 109SG024B. Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as 1 to 3, the gaming property is the same, but the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Furthermore, when changing the playability according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch 109SG024B is set to an effect switch (a predetermined effect is executed every time a game ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B). When the set value is 2 or 3, the third count switch 109SG024B is passed through the third switch switch 109SG024B to change the game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the third count switch 109SG024B. It may be used as a switch for controlling to a big hit game state.

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a variation pattern determination table for a big hit which is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and the variation display result is “small hit”. A variation pattern determination table for a big hit that is used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for a loss that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “losed” is prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-11 (A) and 20-11 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a jackpot variation pattern determination table (the jackpot A) used when the jackpot type is the jackpot A. ) And a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is for jackpot B and jackpot C are prepared in advance. A) and the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C) include the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and the super reach β big hit For each of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a part of the range where the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take A fixed random number value is assigned as a judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, when the set value is “1” in the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit A), in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 997 is set. Up to 300 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, from 301 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and from 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and the fluctuation pattern of 826 to 997 is allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 400 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 401 to 850 is The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned, and 851 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 20-11 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for the jackpot B and the jackpot C), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 out of the determination value range 0 to 997. , 0 to 100 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 101 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 351 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 150 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 151 to 450 The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Further, when the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit.

  As described above, when the jackpot A is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. And lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the superreach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may determine that “big hit B” or “big hit C” may be obtained. Expectations can be increased.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) is the determination value. Assigned as. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20C, even if the set value is “1”, “2”, or “3” in the small hit variation pattern determination table, MR3 Of the determination value range 0 to 997, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as small hit variation patterns. With the setting values “1”, “2”, and “3”, the small hit variation pattern may be determined at a different rate from the plurality of variation patterns.

  Further, the loss variation pattern determination table includes a loss variation pattern determination table A, which is used when the number of stored games is one or less in a low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time saving control, and a low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and variation for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned to the variation pattern of β loss (PA2-3) as the determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 20-12 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for losing (for one or less low base medium total pending storage number), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 0 to 997, the range from 0 to 350 is assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and the range from 351 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, out of the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach, which correspond to the total number of stored storages of 2 to 4, respectively. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 20-12 (B), in the losing variation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 0 to 997 of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach that correspond to the total number of stored memories of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 20-12 (C), in the losing variation pattern determination table C (for the number of low-base medium combined pending storages of 5 or more), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 0 to 997, the range from 0 to 450 is assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-1), and the range from 451 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control are shown. PA2-2) and a variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

  As shown in FIG. 20-12 (D), in the loss variation pattern determination table D (for high-base medium use), when the set value is “1”, out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α. Loss variation patterns (PA2-2) are assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to super reach β loss variation patterns (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  As described above, when the loss variation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, and It becomes lower in the order of 3. Further, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the variation values of 701 to 900 among the determination values are the variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and the variation values of 901 to 997 are the variation of the super reach β loss regardless of the variation pattern determination table. When the fluctuation display result is a loss, the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined at a common decision ratio regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

  The “common determination ratio” in the present embodiment means that the determination ratio is completely the same at different setting values (this embodiment), and that the determination ratio is the same at different setting values. (For example, the setting ratio of the super reach variation pattern differs by about 1% among the set values 1 to 3).

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, an example is described in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this. If the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratios of all fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Exemplifies the same form regardless of the set value that is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the fluctuation display result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of May be the same irrespective of the set value in which only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss is set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Exemplifies a mode in which the set value is the same regardless of the set value that is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the set value, the change ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, a mode in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern is different according to the set setting value is illustrated, but it is set. Depending on the set value that is present, one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns may be present among the non-reach fluctuation patterns and the normal reach fluctuation patterns. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value that has been set means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific variation pattern is 100%. It also includes the determination of the percentage.

  As shown in FIG. 20-12, the variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation pattern (PA1) The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of the variation pattern (PA1-3). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, and the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of four. Sometimes, when the start winning is made, it becomes difficult to cause useless starting winning in which the holding memory is not made, and when the number of the holding memories is reduced, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss without shortening the fluctuation time is long. By determining PA1-1), it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that the variable display is not performed because the variable display time is lengthened.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (A) to 20-12 (C), a variation pattern is determined using a loss variation pattern determination table that differs depending on the total number of pending storages. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is held The variation pattern may be determined by using a different variation pattern determination table for loss according to the stored number and the variation display of the second special symbol when executing the variation display.

  Further, in each loss variation pattern determination table of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in pachinko gaming machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 3, the variation pattern of super reach loss (PA2-2) And PA2-3) have the same range of random numbers. However, since the jackpot probability and the losing probability are different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the super-reach losing variation pattern (the super-reach losing variation pattern) (Appearance rate) differs according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the present embodiment, an example is described in which the rate at which the fluctuation display is performed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss differs according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is not limited to the above, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the fluctuation display is performed at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss. It may be executed.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 20-2 may be a backup RAM partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 102 is retained for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). You. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game.

  In the RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIGS. 20 to 13 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. Have been. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIGS. 20-13 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 109SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 109SG153, a game control counter setting unit 109SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 109SG155.

  The first special map reservation storage unit 109SG151A stores a special winning start (first starting winning) although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, but has not yet started. The game data (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special map holding storage unit 109SG151A associates the winning order (the order in which game balls are detected) into the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the first starting condition for passing (entering) the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like a random number value MR1 for determining a fluctuation display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern. Are stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The suspension data thus stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display) in this special figure game Based on the result, it becomes the hold information that enables to determine whether or not a big hit will be made.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 109SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred, but has not yet started. The reservation data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 109SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the second start winning opening and associates the hold number with the second start condition for passing (entering) the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like a random number value MR1 for determining a fluctuation display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern. , Until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 109SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display) in this special figure game Based on the result, it becomes the hold information that enables to determine whether or not a big hit will be made.

  It should be noted that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening may be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The ordinary figure holding storage unit 109SG151C stores the information on the ordinary figure game that has not been started by the ordinary symbol display 20 yet, even though the game ball passing through the passing gate 109SG041 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure holding storage unit 109SG151C determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game ball, in association with the holding number in the order in which the game ball passed the pass gate 109SG041. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 109SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating a timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value. The numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random number value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. And an output port for transmitting a signal.

  As shown in FIG. 20B, on the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 120. 122, a display control unit 123 that performs processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the like, and updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. A random number circuit 124 for performing the operation and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the electric components for effect is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 120 writes the variable data into the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 A fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from outside the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 includes wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the audio control board 13, Wiring or the like for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating LED data is connected to the lamp control board 14.

  Note that, similarly to the main board 11, a random number value (also referred to as an effect random number) for determining the type of various effects such as a notice effect is set on the effect control board 12 side as well.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 20-2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data configuring a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, and pattern data configuring various effect control patterns. I have.

  As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decoration LED, the effect model, and the like). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used, a display screen displayed for notification of various errors (abnormalities), an error notification pattern such as a lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, an output sound, and the like are stored. I have. The effect control pattern is composed of data and the like indicating control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, a special figure change effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like.

  The special figure change effect control pattern is a period corresponding to a plurality of kinds of change patterns, during a period from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation and display of the fixed special symbol which is the special figure display result. It consists of data showing the control contents of various production operations, such as the fluctuation display operation of the decorative design, the reach production, the production display operation in the re-lottery production, etc., or various production display operations without the fluctuation display of the decoration design. Have been. The announcement effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating control contents of an effect operation which is an announcement effect executed in response to an announcement pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and include data indicating the control contents thereof.

  The special figure change effect control patterns may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different for each change pattern for executing the reach effect.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 20B is provided with an effect control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  The effect control flag setting unit includes a plurality of types of effect operation states such as a display state of an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state.

  The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, a first special figure start winning buffer for performing a hold display in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and a hold in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U are stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. And a second special figure start prize buffer for display. In the first special figure starting prize buffer, a storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of reserved special storages (area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) Is provided in the second special figure start winning buffer in a storage area (buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories in the second special figure reserved storage. Area corresponding to "). The data in the start winning buffer is controlled by an effect control, which will be described later, in response to receiving a first starting opening winning command or a second starting opening winning command, or receiving a first change start command or a second change start command. It is updated in the hold effect process (S72, see FIG. 20-26) in the process process, and based on the updated start winning buffer data in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U. The pending display is updated.

  Specifically, when a first start opening winning designation command is received based on the fact that there is a start winning in the first start winning opening, a round white display is displayed on the hold display in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D. Is newly added, and when the first variation start command is received based on the fact that the variation of the first special figure has been newly started, the topmost one of the suspended displays in the first suspended storage display area 109SG005D ( The hold white display is updated so that the round white display of the holding memory (starting and winning first) is erased, and the other round white displays are shifted (moved) in a predetermined direction (for example, leftward). I do. Similarly, when a second start opening winning designation command is received based on the fact that there is a start winning in the second start winning opening, a round white display is newly added to the hold display in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U. On the other hand, when a second variation start command is received based on the fact that the variation of the second special figure has been newly started, the highest (most first) among the suspension displays in the second suspension storage display area 109SG005U. The hold display is updated so that the round white display of the start winning prize is erased, and the other round white displays are shifted (moved) in a predetermined direction (for example, leftward).

  Here, the display of the counting of the game balls and the ratio of the accessory on the main board 11 of the present embodiment will be described.

  The main board 11 has information on winning of a game, for example, the number of awarded balls by winning a first starting opening (navel), the number of awarding balls by winning a second starting opening (electric chew), the first big win. The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning in the mouth and the second grand prize port (attacker) are input, and the number of shot balls are totaled. The display monitor 109SG029 displays the first grand prize port and the second prize ball among the total number of prize balls. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls occupied by the prize balls to the two major winning openings (attackers), and the number of prize balls by the prize to the second starting prize mouth (electric chew) and the first among the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls occupied by the prize in the grand prize mouth and the second grand prize mouth (attacker), and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. It is displayed. The repetition ratio is a ratio of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls (the number of continuous character-acquired balls described below) due to the prize winning in the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker). The winning ratio is the number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls due to a prize in the second starting prize port (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls in the first prize port and the second grand prize port (attacker) ( The following figure shows the ratio of the number of acquired ball). The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (the total number of balls obtained as described below) is based on the number of prize balls by winning in the first and second large winning openings (attackers) and the winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew). The number of prize balls and prize balls by prize holes (first start prize port, general prize port) other than the first grand prize port, the second grand prize port (attacker) and the second start prize port (denchu). It is the sum of numbers and Note that the first winning opening, the second winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable characters, and the passing width of the game ball is changed so that the game ball is won. It is a character whose assumed ratio fluctuates. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first winning winning opening, the second winning winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (denchu) are fixed auditors, The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning ratio of the game ball is a fixed character.

  As for the method of totaling and calculating the information on the winning of the game, regarding the connection ratio and the winning ratio, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting port (navel) and the general winning port (sode) in the number of 6000 prize balls. (General prize ball count), the number of ordinary power prize balls (number of power chute prize balls), which is the number of prize balls awarded in the second start winning port (power chute), the first grand prize port and the second grand prize port The number of special prize prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning the (Attacker), is totaled. The total is defined as one set, and the connection ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of award balls (general award balls), the number of ordinary electric winning award balls (the number of electric Chu award balls), and the number of special electric playing The number of award balls (the number of attacker award balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated every set. I have. In other words, the storage of 11 sets of 6000 pieces is stored in a considerable amount (for example, for several bytes), and the total ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) of the totals can be calculated. For the base, the number of launched game balls with respect to the number of 60000 awarded balls is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of game balls launched is calculated.

  The display monitor 109SG029 displays the connection ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), the total connection ratio (%), the combination ratio (%) of the 6000 pieces, and the base calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to complete the display, but the number of prize balls due to the prize at the first start port (navel) and the prize to the second start prize port (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. , The number of prize balls due to winning in the first winning port and the second winning port (attacker) changes. Then, for example, if the number of winning balls won after displaying the connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning percentage (%) for 60000 pieces displayed thereafter, for example, There is a possibility that a discrepancy occurs between the repetition ratio (%) and the role ratio (%) of 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting opening (navel), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chute), the winning of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker). If the number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls are input and totalized at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of the connection ratio (%) of 6000), such a discrepancy can be avoided. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, a storage area for storing information related to a game prize is provided for each set value, and includes a general prize prize ball, a first starting opening prize sphere, a normal power prize sphere, a special power prize ball, and the like. The prize balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. Therefore, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the present embodiment can be individually calculated for each set value.

  In the following, as an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60000, and the number of prize balls by the prize in the second starting prize port (Den Chu) and the first prize port and the second prize port (attacker). The calculation method of the ratio of the bonuses (combination ratio (%)) when the number of the bonuses acquired balls, which is the sum of the number of the prize balls by winning the prize, is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of the acquired bonus balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of continuous role-acquiring balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker. The hit total is the cumulative number of game media hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). The winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Connection ratio = [Number of consecutive bonus balls acquired / Total number of acquisitions] × 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(number of continuous role-acquired balls + number of role-acquired balls) / total number of gains] × 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total hits] × 100 (3)

  When the total number of prize balls is 60000 and the number of obtained bonus balls is 42,000, the bonus ratio is obtained as 0.70 (three digits after the decimal point are cut off) by dividing 42,000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, calculations using the following method are required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of the accessory acquisition balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60000. This requires 70 as the quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, a second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by the 600. This requires 70 as the quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be divided by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a three-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate a long-lived bonus ratio. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of the obtained ball.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform only operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method which is performed by simplifying the above-described second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte of 10h is discarded from the 00A410h of the number of the acquired ball, and the number of the acquired ball is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, while the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is facilitated, an error of + 12% occurs. However, when both the total number of prize balls and the number of winning ball obtained are 10 times, the error is + 1%. That is, as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original value.

  The board case 109SG201 is formed of a material having a light-transmitting property, and the main board 11 and the display monitor 109SG029 are visible. The board case 109SG201 has a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 109SG029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 109SG029 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to view the main board 11 and the main board 11. Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform only operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method which is performed by simplifying the above-described second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte of 10h is discarded from the 00A410h of the number of the acquired ball, and the number of the acquired ball is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In addition, a storage area in which information on game winning is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (sum of information on game winning stored in a ring buffer provided with 10 counters of maximum 2 bytes), award ball The total number buffer is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be stored continuously. The ring buffer will be further described later. It should be noted that the stored value of the checksum is calculated and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to the winning of a game when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive bonus balls obtained is larger than the value of the number of balls obtained. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization processing, or an error display or a warning display may be performed, or the initialization processing may be performed after the display. The error display and the warning display will be further described later.

  The calculation of the winning combination (%) is, for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of acquired bonus balls is 19876, the divisor is divided by 34321 for 19876, and the ratio is calculated. 19876/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the winning combination (%) is about 57.9%. When an operation is performed in the game control microcomputer 100, the calculation at the decimal point must be avoided. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is truncated to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that it is 57% of the duty ratio (%), and it is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. In this case, the value calculated by the accurate calculation is different from the value calculated by the accurate calculation. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, resulting in + 0.3% error. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, the accurate value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display is changed from 69% to 70% by 1%. Although it is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error on the display of the error of 1%.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Further, when the value is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1% and may be even larger. That is, the error increases as the total number of acquired balls decreases. Therefore, until the total number of acquired balls equal to or more than a specific number (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by the counter, the display ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. Even if the display is performed, the possibility that the error may be large may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  Further, the display monitor 109SG029 displays the combination ratio (%), the connection ratio (%), and the base (%) on seven segments, and switches the values at predetermined intervals (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the winning ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a game medium newly wins on the electric chute or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly changes the ratio ( %), The value of the winning combination (%) may be different from the value of the consecutive winning (%). For this reason, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated within the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

  Also, when the numerical value that can be displayed in seven segments is two digits (for example, when two seven segments are provided), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 109SG029 shown in FIG. 20-15 (A), a numerical value can be displayed in the lower two digits, but in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under a specific condition.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the sensors provided on the attacker and the electric chew each detect that a game medium has won, and individually count the number of prize balls based on the detection result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and uses a sensor provided after a discharge path for discharging a game medium that has won an attacker and a game medium that has won a power chute is used, and the detection result is used. , The number of the accessory acquired balls and the number of the continuous accessory acquired balls may be totaled.

  Hereinafter, the display of the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base will be described more specifically. In the present embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 1). On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided.

  The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth general winning number counter. A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of winnings of the first winning opening and the second winning opening (attacker) is counted by the winning counter, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a first large winning number counter for counting the number of winnings in the first large winning opening and a second large winning number counter for counting the number of winnings in the second large winning opening are separately provided, The number of winnings in the first large winning opening and the number of winnings in the second large winning opening may be individually counted, and the respective winning numbers may be summed up to be the number of winnings to the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 109SG026B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 109SG026C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 109SG026D. The large winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 109SG023 and the second count switch 109SG024A.

  A clear switch (not shown) is connected to the main board 11. The clear switch is arranged at a position on the back side of the game board 2 where an employee or the like cannot easily operate the clear switch. By operating the clear switch, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when the calculation of the connection ratio or the winning ratio has to be performed again, for example, when the calculation of the connection ratio or the winning ratio has an obstacle. For this reason, this switch does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal connection ratio or a winning combination. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

  As described above, the main board 11 is provided with the RTC 106, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings. In the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 11 is housed in the board case 109SG201. A caulking pin (not shown) is attached to the board case 109SG201. With the provision of the caulking pins, the main board 11 is completely sealed in the board case 109SG201, thereby preventing an improper act on the main board 11. The board case 109SG201 is a swaged board case (hereinafter also referred to as a “swaging board case”).

  The display monitor 109SG029 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing seal (not shown) for certifying that the main substrate 11 is sealed is attached to the substrate case 109SG201. The sealing seal is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the board case 109SG201. The sealing seal is arranged at a position distant from the main substrate 11 and at a position different from a position where visibility of the display monitor 109SG029 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 109SG029. Thus, the display monitor 109SG029 is arranged at a position that is not hidden by the seal.

  The display monitor 109SG029 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, a fourth display unit 29D, and a fifth display unit 29E. Each of the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E is composed of seven segments composed of seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in a very short cycle.

  The display monitor 109SG029 displays items of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. The tally set values (1 to 3) are displayed in the first digit first display unit 29A, and the tally period is displayed in the second digit second display unit 29B and the third digit third display unit 29C. The numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the fourth display unit 29D at the fourth digit and the fifth display unit 29E at the fifth digit. In display No. 1, a short-term connection ratio is displayed, and in display No. 2, a short-term winning ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the total ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 4, the total winning combination is displayed. Display No. 5 displays the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls, and display No. 6 displays the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. Is done.

  Here, the short term means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6,000. The period in which the total sum is obtained means the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated without depending on the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the repetition ratio may be a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening during the jackpot game state. The winning combination is defined as a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls due to winning in the large winning opening in the jackpot game state. Is also good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit 29B and the second display unit 29C are displayed. “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. Further, when the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the short-term duty ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term winning combination is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the total cumulative combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total display ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. “B6.” Is displayed on the display 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative winning combination is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E.

  In calculating the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base, the main board 11 is used to calculate the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening. , The total number of game balls that have entered the fourth general winning opening and the number of game balls that have discharged from the outlet are calculated. In the main processing, the CPU 103 executes the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the first count switch 109SG023, the second count switch 109SG024A, and the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A to the fourth general. A switch process is performed to check the state of each of the winning port switch 109SG026D and the discharge port switch 109SG070 (the presence or absence of a detection signal).

  In this switch processing, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signals are output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, The values of the first start winning number counter and the second start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the first count switch 109SG023 and the second count switch 109SG024A, the value of the big win number counter is added. When the detection signal is output from the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A, the second general winning opening switch 109SG026B, the third general winning opening switch 109SG026C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 109SG026D, the first general winning number counter, Second general prize counter, third general prize counter, fourth general prize counter When the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 109SG070, the value of the number of hits counter is added, and the number of game balls entering each entry area (the number of entry to each winning port) is increased. Game balls). The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  As described above, the step of counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processing for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. (Included in the switch process), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without having to execute a separate counting program, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls by winning in each winning opening based on the totaled number of game balls winning in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let it. The number of prize balls by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize to the winning opening by the number of winnings to the winning opening. The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls is determined in advance for each winning port.

  As shown in FIG. 20-16, the number of prize balls for each winning port divided here is a general winning port prize ball (first general winning port to a fourth general winning port (sode)). ), First start winning opening prize ball (winning prize ball in the first start winning opening (navel)), normal electric prize sphere (winning prize ball in electric chew), special electric prize winning ball (to attacker Prize balls). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of hit game balls. Although the CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won to the general winning opening and the number of game balls won to the first starting opening, the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening and the first starting opening. The number of game ball winnings may be summed up. Although the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting opening prize ball are calculated individually, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the first starting opening prize ball are calculated. May be collectively calculated.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of awarded balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (up to 2 bytes). The active buffer has a zero storage area including a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls by winning in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 prize balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening that increases as the game progresses is added. The eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for each of the winning prize holes, the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and the total sum. I have. The storage area for the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

  Further, the RAM 102 has an association ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the connection ratio of 10 sets and the total total, a base of 10 sets (base 2), and a base of the previous 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area for storing The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning combination and the total ratio of the 10 sets and the total total based on the number of prize balls based on the winning number of the game balls to each of the winning ports of the 10 sets and the total total. In addition, the combination ratio and the total ratio are stored in a ratio combination ratio storage area. Each of the connection ratio storage areas for storing the combination ratios and the connection ratios of the 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. When the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total are stored in, for example, integers, they can be stored with a margin by a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Further, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base of 10 sets by the number of hits of the game balls into the winning holes of 10 sets for each of the winning sets, and calculates the base of the 10 sets (base 2) and the last time. The base (base 1) calculated from the number of hits of the game balls to the winning ports for each of 10 sets for each winning port is stored in the base storage area. When the bases 1 and 2 are stored as integers, for example, they can be stored with a margin by a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 on the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 20-17 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-described internal registers, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. More specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 20-17, the address / data signal lines of the ROM 101 correspond to the ROM area of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number. 0000H to 2FBFH, 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to a program management area), and the CPU 103 reads data from the ROM 101 by designating the ROM area. In the present embodiment, the ROM area is managed by dividing it into eight areas, a first area to an eighth area, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  Further, the address / data signal lines of the built-in register are allocated to a register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and transfers data to the register via this register area. Is written.

  The address / data signal lines of the RAM 102 are allocated to RWM areas (F000H to F3FFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 specifies the RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to read data from the RAM 102. Write data. The other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  As shown in FIG. 20-18, a RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (in this embodiment, a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH) is a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas. It is composed of The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area stores instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The data for the configured control program (which may be simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area includes reference data referred to by the control program. (For example, the various lottery data described above) are temporarily stored.

  Further, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the winning combination is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of winning balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the total hand combination ratio. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a zero storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having first to tenth storage areas, and the number of prize balls (10 sets) for each winning opening. ), And a storage area for 10 sets. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data having different subroutine start addresses are stored.

  In the present embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and the above-described data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, etc.) can be stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of continuous addresses in the RAM control area. are doing.

  Further, the main board 11 controls the display monitor 109SG029 to display the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 20A is a time chart illustrating display times of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 20A, when the display on the display monitor 109SG029 is started, first, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-1), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. In addition, the short-term ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term duty ratio of the display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-2), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. Further, the short-term winning ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the display of the display No. 2 is continued for 5 seconds, the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-3), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. The fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the total cumulative connection ratio. For example, when the total cumulative connection ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the display of the display No. 3 is continued for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-4), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. The fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the total total winning combination. For example, when the total total winning combination is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. The character is displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. The base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. The character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. The short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. In the display color, only the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 are red. In this manner, the display monitor 109SG029 switches and displays the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Further, the display of the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 is as shown in FIGS. 20-19 (A) to 29-19 (C). Based on the operation of the display changeover switch 109SG030, the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the display of the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, and the set value is “2” ”, Short-term ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, display of base 1 and base 2, short-term ratio, short-term ratio, total cumulative total when the set value is“ 3 ” It is possible to sequentially change the display to the display of the ratio, the total accumulated ratio, the base 1, and the base 2. If the display changeover switch 109SG030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "2", and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “2”.

  When the display changeover switch 109SG030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative connection ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 when the set value is “2”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “3”, and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “3”.

  When the display changeover switch 109SG030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “3”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “1”, and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “1”.

  The display monitor 109SG029 according to the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The 109SG029 may be able to display only one numerical value or only any two numerical values among these connection ratio, combination ratio, and base.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base are displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to display the history of the awarded number of awarded balls on the display monitor 109SG029 without calculating the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Good.

  In the present embodiment, only the short-term ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 109SG029, and the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The short-term ratio and the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio and the total cumulative role ratio are displayed in the same color, and the short-term ratio, It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

  When the total prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reach the predetermined capacity of 6000, the main board 11 updates the storage in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer. Further, the storage unit stores the sum and total cumulative storage area for 10 sets and the combination and combination ratio storage area for storing the combination and total ratio of the 10 sets and total.

  In updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. For example, as shown in FIGS. 20-20, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the ninth storage area are “27”, “81”, “120”, “36”, “225”, and “87”, respectively. It is assumed that they are "66", "117", "45", and "21". At this time, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area are respectively “27”, “81”, and “81”. 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Further, the number of award balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of award balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

  When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily deleted and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

(Setting change processing)
Next, a change in the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. First, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-21, in the above-described game control main process (see FIG. 3), after executing the initialization process (step S8), the CPU 103 Then, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 109SG051 is ON (step 109SGSa11). If the lock switch 109SG051 is ON (step 109SGSa11; Yes), it is determined whether or not the door open sensor 109SG090 is ON (step 109SGSa12). If the door open sensor 109SG090 is ON (step 109SGSa12; Yes), the setting change process (step 109SGSa13) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 109SGSa14.

  The CPU 103 receives the operation of the setting switch 109SG052 and the lock switch 109SG051 by executing the setting change process (step 109SGSa13), and enters a state where the set value can be changed. In the setting change process, the setting status of the set value can be confirmed on the display of the display monitor 109SG029.

  Then, after executing the setting change process (step 109SGSa13), after executing step S7, if the lock switch 109SG051 is OFF (step 109SGSa11; No), if the door open sensor 109SG090 is OFF (step 109SGSa12; No) In step 109 SGSa14, the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 are read out, and the read set values are set as the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and then the processing of step S10 and thereafter is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change processing, the CPU 103 sends a command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the set value. May be output. As described above, when the CPU 103 can output a command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the set value set, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize the newly set value. Therefore, at a specific timing of the game (for example, during the fluctuation display or at the end of the big hit game), a notification effect of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a notification notification effect of the set value 1 or the like), It is possible to execute a setting value suggestion effect indicating the setting value of the gaming machine 1.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by the CPU 103 executing the setting change process is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. When executing the setting change processing, the CPU 103 may output a command for notifying the effect control board 12 that the setting change processing is being executed. As described above, when the command for notifying the effect control board 12 that the setting change process is being executed is output from the CPU 103, the effect that the CPU 103 is executing the setting change process is determined by the effect control process. Since the CPU 120 can recognize, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed by image display on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission from the game effect lamp 9, and the like. It is possible to notify the surroundings of something.

  For example, during the execution of the setting change process, characters such as “setting is being changed” are displayed on a black background on the image display device 5 and sounds such as “setting is being changed” are repeatedly output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Other displays (for example, decorative designs and small designs, fourth designs, right-handed displays, etc.) on the image display device 5 may be prevented from being displayed, but these decorative designs, small designs, fourth designs, right-handed displays, etc. May be displayed during the execution of the setting change process. Further, during the execution of the setting change processing of the present embodiment, since the special symbol and the ordinary symbol are not displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device. 20 is not displayed at all, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the execution of the setting change process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device In 20, a symbol indicating that the setting change process is being executed or a symbol indicating a specific display result (for example, a loss) may be stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, a symbol indicating that the setting change process is being executed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the ordinary symbol display device 20 while the setting change process is being executed. Although the form which stops and displays the design which shows a specific display result (for example, loss) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first hold display is displayed during the execution of the setting change process. The display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the general-use hold display 25C may be caused to emit light (for example, for blinking repeatedly) in a mode indicating that the setting change process is being executed. Further, a display (number of rounds display) for displaying the number of rounds during the big hit game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an instruction for the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the right game area). When a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided for performing the setting change processing, these displays may be made to emit light in a mode indicating that the setting change process is being executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the clear switch is in the ON state (S3; Y), when the backup data is not stored (S4; N), or when the backup RAM is not normal (S5; N). Although the lock switch 109SG051 and the door open sensor 109SG090 are ON (109SGSa11, 109SGSa12) and the setting change process (109SGSa13) are executed, the present invention is not limited to this. If the backup data is not stored (S4; N) or the backup RAM is not normal (S5; N), if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off in an abnormal state, or if the power is It is determined that the clear switch is on because it is a possible event when If (S3; Y) only whether the determination (109SGSa11,109SGSa12) and or tablets switches 109SG051 or door opening sensor 109SG090 is ON, the may perform the setting change processing (109SGSa13). That is, when the backup data is not stored (S4; N) or when the backup RAM is not normal (S5; N), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be taken over.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by the CPU 103 executing the setting change process is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The CPU 103 may be able to check the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the display monitor 109SG029, but may be able to execute a process in which the set value cannot be changed (hereinafter, a setting check process). When the CPU 103 can execute the setting confirmation process in this way, the CPU 103 may output a command for notifying the effect control board 12 that the setting confirmation process is being executed. As described above, when the command for notifying the effect control board 12 that the setting confirmation process is being executed is output from the CPU 103, it is determined that the CPU 103 is executing the setting confirmation process. Since the CPU 120 can recognize, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed by image display on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission from the game effect lamp 9, and the like. It is possible to notify the surroundings of something.

  Note that the setting confirmation process only needs to be executable on condition that the lock switch 109SG051 and the door open sensor 109SG090 are turned on after the CPU 103 executes the initialization process of the main process (see FIG. 3). However, for example, during the special symbol fluctuation display and during the big hit game, during the small hit game, when the special symbol fluctuation display is not executed but there is a hold memory, a predetermined period after the error is detected, During a predetermined period such as paying out a prize ball, waiting for a game ball to enter the big hit game start gate (only when the big hit game start gate is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1), the lock switch 109SG051 and the door are opened. The setting confirmation process may not be executed even when the open sensor 109SG090 is turned on.

  Further, after the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation processing and displays the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display monitor 109SG029, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 without switching the lock switch 109SG051 to OFF. May be enabled in a state where is set.

  Next, the processing status of the setting change process and the display mode of the display monitor 109SG029 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-22 (A) and 20-22 (B), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a game clerk or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply stops, the display on the display monitor 109SG029 ends. In addition, if the big winning port is open at the timing of turning off the power, such as during a big hit game or a small hit game, the supply of power to the solenoid 82 is stopped to close the big winning port.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20C, when a clerk of the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the lock switch 109SG051 is turned on. , And the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on condition that the door opening sensor 109SG090 is ON, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029.

  In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 in this manner, as shown in FIG. 20-22 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 109SG052 by the store clerk of the game arcade or the like. The numerical values displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 are sequentially updated (for example, each time the setting switch 109SG052 is operated, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 →...).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20E, the CPU 103 changes the set value displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 into the RAM 102 based on the detection of the pressing operation of the lock switch 109SG051 by the store clerk at the game arcade. Store (update) in the backup area. At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 109SG029 to notify a clerk of the game hall or the like that the new setting value has been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared.

  In FIG. 20E, the CPU 103 stores the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, as shown in a characteristic portion 2 of the present embodiment described later (see FIGS. 20-40 to 20-46). The setting secret value may be converted, and a setting value designation command including the setting secret value may be output to the effect control board 12. When the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) receives the set value designation command from the CPU 103, the effect control board 12 specifies and stores the set value from the set value designation command, thereby setting the set value. A suggested effect (setting value suggested effect) may be executed. In addition, when the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20A (timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the special winning opening is opened again. Thereafter, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process based on the fact that the lock switch 109SG051 has been turned OFF by the operation of the game clerk or the like, and sets the game in a playable state, that is, the fluctuation display result, the big hit type, and the fluctuation pattern. The determination lottery, the payout of the prize balls, and the like are enabled.

  Note that, in the setting change processing according to the present embodiment, a form in which the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 in the setting change process is not the setting value most advantageous to the player (“1” in the present embodiment) or the most disadvantageous value to the player. The set value (“3” in the present embodiment) may be displayed.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 20 to 23 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (109SGS010). Then, by executing a predetermined switch process, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 109SG023, the second count switch 109SG024A, and the third The state of a detection signal input from various switches such as the count switch 109SG024B, the fourth count switch 109SG024C, and the outlet switch 109SG070 is determined (109SGS011).

  Subsequently, when a game ball is won in any of the general winning opening 109SG050A to the general winning opening 109SG050D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first winning opening, and the second winning opening 109SG712, That is, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the first count switch 109SG023, the second count switch 109SG024A, the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A, the second general winning opening switch 109SG026B, and the third general winning opening switch. When a detection signal is input from the 109SG026C and the fourth general winning opening switch 109SG026D, a prize ball process (109SGS012) for setting the number of prize balls corresponding to a prize by each detection signal is executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 displays winning information such as a winning ratio such as a winning combination such as a winning combination such as a winning combination such as a base ratio and a base, and displays winning information such as a winning ratio such as a winning ratio such as a winning ratio calculated based on the winning information and a base. Is performed (109SGS014). Thereafter, by executing predetermined main-side error processing (109SGS015), abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as big hit information, start information, probability variation information, payout information and the like which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output. (109SGS016).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number such as the random number value MR1 or the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (109SGS017). . Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (109SGS018). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation on the display device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007 in a predetermined procedure.

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (109SGS019). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off the segment LED) on the ordinary symbol display 20 by executing the ordinary symbol process process, and displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and the movable wings in the variable winning ball device 6B. Enables setting of one-sided tilting operation.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (109SGS020). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the settings in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 After setting control data in an output port for transmitting an effect control command to the effect control board 12, setting predetermined control data in an output port of the effect control INT signal and turning on the effect control INT signal for a predetermined time. By switching from the state to the off state or the like, it is possible to transmit an effect control command based on the settings in the command transmission table. After the command control process is executed, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after the interrupt control is set.

  In the command control process of 109SGS020, a command for notifying a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a command for notifying that a change pattern or a change display has been completed, or the like is provided. May be transmitted to the effect control board 12 periodically by transmitting the existing command including the information of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, by receiving these commands from the main board 11, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) executes an effect indicating the set value at various timings, such as during a variable display or a big hit game. You may.

  FIG. 20-24 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed by the 109SGS018 shown in FIG. 20-23 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (109SGS021). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of 109SGS022 to 109SGS031 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152.

  In the start prize winning process of 109SGS021, it is determined whether or not there has been a first or second start prize by the first or second start port switch 22A or 22B. The random number value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted, and in the case of the first starting prize, the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is determined. It is stored at the highest rank, and when the second start prize is awarded, it is stored at the highest rank of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B. In the start winning process, when a start winning is generated, a setting for transmitting the first start opening winning designation command and the second start winning designation command to the effect control board 12 is also executed. Note that the first starting opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command are output to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (109SGS020).

  The special symbol normal process of 109SGS022 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are stored based on the presence / absence of the reserved data stored in the first special figure reserved storage unit 109SG151A and the second special figure reserved storage unit 109SG151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special figure game on the display device 4B. In the special symbol normal process, a special symbol or a decorative symbol is determined based on a display result determination table (see FIG. 20-8) corresponding to the set value and numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a variable display result. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not to make the variable display result “big hit” before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the special symbol change display result in the special symbol game, a fixed special symbol (big hit symbol or large hit symbol) in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. A small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of 109SGS023 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is selected from a plurality of types using numerical data indicating a random value MR3 for variation pattern determination based on a result of a predetermined determination as to whether or not the variation display result is “big hit”. For example, a process for determining whether or not to perform the determination is included. The variation pattern is determined using one of the variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-11 to 20-12 according to the set value, the variation display result, and the big hit type. When the fluctuation pattern setting process is executed and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  By the special symbol normal processing of 109SGS022 and the fluctuation pattern setting processing of 109SGS023, the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation display time of the fixed special symbol, the special symbol, and the decoration symbol, which are the fluctuation display results of the special symbol, is determined. That is, the special symbol normal process and the variation pattern setting process use the random value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, and perform The processing for determining the variable display mode is included.

  The special symbol variation process of 109SGS024 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol change process includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. And the like. For example, every time the special symbol variation processing of 109SGS024 is executed, the special figure variation timer value, which is a stored value in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting section 109SG153, is decremented or added by 1 Regardless of whether the game is a special figure game using the first special figure on the special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B, the time elapsed by the common timer. A time measurement is taken. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol change processing of 109SGS024 is performed by changing the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. It is only necessary that the processing be such that the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using is controlled by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop processing of 109SGS025 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the change of the special symbol, and stop display (derivation) of the fixed special symbol which is the result of the special symbol change display. The processing for making the setting for causing the error is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is on. If the big hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Is done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is on, and the small hit flag is on. In this case, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing of 109SGS026 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In the big hit opening pre-processing, a process for starting the round in the big hit game state and setting the first big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is "big hit" or the like. And so on. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period in which the first big winning opening is opened is set according to whether the big hit type is “big hit A”, “big hit B”, or “big hit C”. Is also good. As an example, regardless of the jackpot type, the upper limit of the period in which the first big winning opening is kept open is set to “29 seconds”, and the number of times of opening the first big winning opening, which is the upper limit number of times the round is executed, The setting of “big hit A” is set to “5 times”, “big hit B” is set to “10 times”, and “big hit C” is set to “15 times”. I just need. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit opening processing of 109SGS027 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during opening of the jackpot is based on the processing of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the first big winning opening and the number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the first count switch 109SG023. And a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the first special winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the first special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 109SG082 for the first special winning opening door 109SG701, the value of the special drawing process flag is set to “6”. Is updated to ".

  The big hit end processing of 109SGS028 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In the big hit end processing, a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is performed by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the like. The process includes a process of waiting until time elapses, a process of performing various settings (setting of a time-saving flag) for starting time-saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state, and the like. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  Specifically, in the jackpot termination process, the type of the executed jackpot is specified. If the specified big hit type is "big hit A", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" without setting the time saving flag. If the specified big hit type is "big hit B", a time saving flag is set, and a count initial value ("20" in the present embodiment) corresponding to "big hit B" is set in the time saving number counter. Update the value of the process flag to “0”. If the specified big hit type is "big hit C", a time saving flag is set and a count initial value ("100" in the present embodiment) corresponding to "big hit C" is set in a time saving number counter. The value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit release pre-processing of 109SGS029 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The small hit opening pre-processing is for starting the execution of the round in the small hitting game state and opening the second big winning opening 109SG712 based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is "small hit". The processing for setting is included. At this time, for example, based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “small hit”, the upper limit of the period in which the second large winning opening 109SG712 is opened is set to “1 second”, and the upper limit number of times the round is executed is set. By setting the number of times of opening of the second big winning opening 109SG712 to "1", the setting of the small hit state may be performed. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”.

  In this embodiment, in the small hit state, the number of times the second large winning opening 109SG712 is opened is set to "1", and the upper limit of the period during which the second large winning opening 109SG712 is opened is set to "1 second". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times of opening the second big winning opening 109SG712 in the small hit state may be two or more times, and may be two or more times. The upper limit of the period during which the winning opening 109SG712 is opened may be a period other than “1 second” as long as the gaming ball can enter the second winning opening 109SG712.

  The small hit opening processing in S30 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time since the second large winning opening 109SG712 was opened, and the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the second count switch 109SG024A. The processing includes determining whether or not it is time to return the second large winning opening 109SG712 from the open state to the closed state based on the second large winning opening 109SG712. Then, when returning the second special winning opening 109SG712 to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 109SG083 for the second special winning opening door 109SG711, the value of the special drawing process flag is set to “ 9 "is updated.

  The small hit end processing of 109SGS031 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. This small hit end processing corresponds to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is performed by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the like. The processing includes waiting for the waiting time to elapse. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIGS. 20 to 25 are flowcharts illustrating an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 starts execution of the main processing when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining a start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control is performed (109SGS051). Then, effect control CPU 120 shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (109SGS052). When a timer interrupt occurs, effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt processing. In the main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (109SGS053) and executes the following process.

  The effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 109SGS054). In this command analysis processing, effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed as to which command (see FIG. 20-5).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs an effect control process (109SGS055). In the effect control process process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number updating process for updating the count value of a counter for generating an effect random number such as a big hit symbol determination random number is executed (109SGS056), and thereafter, the process proceeds to 109SGS052.

  FIG. 20-26 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (109SGS055) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process process, first, effect control CPU 120 executes a hold effect process for executing an effect control related to hold display and active display (109SGS072). In the hold effect process according to the present embodiment, effect control CPU 120 determines whether the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the first hold storage display area 109SG005D has received the first start opening winning designation command or the second start opening winning designation command. The suspension display can be displayed in the active display area 109SG005F based on the update of the suspension display in the 2 suspension storage display area 109SG005U and the reception of the first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command. In addition, in the holding effect process, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the first start winning effect and the second start winning effect.

  The first start winning effect means that the hold display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the active display area 109SG005F is active, as shown in FIGS. 20-27 (A) and 20-27 (B). During the variable display in which the display is displayed, when a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening, the hold display is moved from the character image 109SGC to the display position of the new hold display in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D. This is an effect of moving and displaying. It should be noted that the moving display of the hold display of the first start winning effect is determined by a position (holding in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D) determined beforehand at the start of the first start winning effect based on the first special figure hold storage number. The process is terminated by moving to a position determined according to the number of stored data.

  20-27 (C) and FIG. 20-27 (D), the first start winning effect refers to the first start winning effect in a state where the number of stored memories is 0 and the variable display is not executed. When a start winning is generated in the start winning opening, the active display is moved and displayed from the character image 109SGC to the active display area 109SG005F via the first hold storage display area 109SG005D.

  After that, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of 109SGS073 to 109SGS082 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (109SGS073): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a fluctuation pattern designation command has been received in the command analysis processing. If the variation pattern designation command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (109SGS074).

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (109SGS074): Control is performed so that the variation of the decoration symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process (109SGS075).

  Decorative symbol change processing (109SGS075): Controls the switching timing of each change state (change speed) constituting the change pattern, and monitors the end of the change time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decoration symbol fluctuation stop processing (109SGS076).

  Decoration symbol fluctuation stop processing (109SGS076): Based on the reception of an effect control command (design confirmation command) for instructing stop of all symbols, the control of stopping the decoration symbol fluctuation and deriving and displaying the display result (stop symbol) is performed. Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display processing (109SGS077), the small hit display processing (109SGS080) or the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting processing (109SGS073).

  Big hit display processing (109SGS077): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit on the image display device 5. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot in-game process (109SGS078).

  Big hit game processing (109SGS078): Control during big hit games. For example, when a special winning opening opening command or a special winning opening opening command is received, display control of the number of rounds on the image display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process (109SGS079).

  Big hit end effect processing (109SGS079): The image display device 5 performs display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (109SGS073).

  Small hit display processing (109SGS080): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a small hit on the image display device 5. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting game processing (109SGS081).

  Small hitting game processing (109SGS081): Control during a small hitting game is performed. For example, when a special winning opening opening command or a special winning opening opening command is received, display control of the number of rounds on the image display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process (109SGS082).

  Small hit end effect processing (109SGS082): The image display device 5 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (109SGS073) or the big hit display process (109SGS077).

  In the present embodiment, when the above-described first start winning effect is executed, the end of the change display and the start of the new change display during the execution of the first start winning effect cause the first hold storage. The number of suspended displays displayed in the display area 109SG005D may change (decrease). In such a case, as shown in FIG. 20-28 (A) to FIG. 20-28 (E), the destination (stop position) in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D of the hold display of the first start winning prize effect target. ) May be continued, and then the first start winning effect may be continued.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 20-28 (A) to 20-28 (E), the end of the fluctuation display and the start of a new fluctuation display during the execution of the first start winning effect toward the hold 4 display position. When the hold display displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D is shifted based on the fact that the first hold storage display area 109SG005D has been changed to the second hold storage display area 109SG005D If the hold display is no longer displayed at the hold 3 display position), the destination in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D of the hold display of the first start winning effect is re-determined to the hold 3 display position, The 1st winning prize production may be continued.

  In addition, during a specific effect that suggests that the change display result will be a big hit, such as a reach effect during a change in super reach, the first start winning effect can be performed to make the player pay attention to the reach effect. Will be gone. Therefore, in the hold effect processing according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-29 (A) and 20-29 (B), during the execution of a specific effect such as during the reach effect while the super reach is changing, When a new start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening, the first starting winning effect is not executed, and only the new holding display is additionally displayed in the first holding storage display area 109SG005D. It is possible to prevent the interest in the reach production from being reduced by the 1st prize production.

(Modification 1)
In the present embodiment, the first start winning effect and the second start winning effect are executed as the appearance display in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-30 (B), when a new starting prize is generated when the number of retained storages is 0 and the variable display is not being executed, The hold display may be displayed as an active display in the active display area 109SH005F without executing the 2 start winning effect, or the hold display may be changed from the character image 109SGC to the first hold storage display area 109SG005D as the 2nd start winning effect. May be directly moved to the active display area 109SG005F without passing through. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the period from the occurrence of a new start winning prize until the active display is displayed in the active display area 109SG005F.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a form in which a white circular hold display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes (for example, a blue circle, a red circle, a white triangle, a white square, and the like) are provided as the display modes of the hold display, and in which display mode the hold display is displayed. Thus, in the variable display corresponding to each hold display, a hold change effect indicating the ratio of the change display result to the big hit (big hit expectation) may be made executable.

(Modification 2)
In this way, when the degree of big hit expectation is changed in accordance with the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display of the first start winning effect may be changed during the first start winning effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-31 (A) to 20-31 (D) as a modified example 2, a movable body is provided on the side of the image display device 5, and during the execution of the first start winning effect. By disposing the movable body on the movement path of the hold display, the hold display is hidden from the player. Then, by changing the display mode of the hold display during the concealment, the display mode of the hold display during the first start winning effect is changed (from the round white display to the star-shaped white display shown in FIG. 20-31 (D)). Display 109SG005H1). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the display modes of the hold display of the first start winning effect is to be changed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  Also, in the second modification, the movable body conceals the hold display of the first start winning prize production target and changes the display mode of the hold display during the concealment, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as shown in FIGS. 20-32 (A) to 20-32 (D), the hold display of the first start prize production target is displayed on the image display device 5 instead of the movable body. The display mode of the hold display during the first startup prize effect is changed by changing the display mode of the hold display during the concealment by changing the display mode of the hold display during the concealment (character image 109SG005G shown in FIG. 20-32 (C)). (The change from the white display of the pattern to the white display 109SG005H2 of the square type shown in FIG. 20-32 (D)).

(Modification 3)
Further, in the present embodiment, the mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be executable during the game. In the case of changing the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game, as shown in FIGS. 20-33 (A) to 20-33 (C) as a third modification, for example, first, a clerk at a game hall is used. After the game machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the lock switch 109SG0051 is turned on to display the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display monitor (the first display unit 109SG029A), and When a store clerk or the like operates the setting changeover switch 109SG052, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 109SG029A is changed.

  Then, when a store clerk at the amusement arcade presses the lock switch 109SG051, the numerical value (set value) displayed on the first display unit 109SG029A is set as a new set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the RAM 102 is backed up. It may be stored in the area. After the new set value is set, the game control data holding area 109SG150 is cleared, so that the special figure hold storage, the general figure hold storage, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153, Various flags and data stored in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155, and the like may be deleted.

  In this manner, by clearing the game control data holding area 109SG150, a change in the set value causes a new hold memory in which the variable display result becomes a big hit. It can be prevented from being released (generating a normal drawing hit) and the result of the fluctuation display during execution being unduly large hit. Further, by clearing the game control data holding area 109SG150, the big winning opening is closed when the big hit game is being played, or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed when the variable winning ball device 6B is open. It is possible to prevent the player from obtaining inappropriate profit. Further, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new set value, it is possible to prevent the suspension storage from being erased even though a new set value is not set.

  In the third modification, the mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed during the game is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and thus the pachinko game is performed during the game. When the set value of the machine 1 can be changed, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the LED, and the like are performed based on the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 by a frame opening detection sensor (not shown). By providing an opening notifying unit capable of notifying that the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is being opened, it is possible to prevent the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being illegally changed.

  Further, when the release notification means is provided in this manner, it is determined whether or not the hold storage is stored in the game control data holding area 109SG150 while the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is being opened, and the game control data holding area 109SG150 is determined. When the hold storage is stored in the game control data holding area 109SG150, the notification may be performed in a notification mode different from that in the case where the hold storage is not stored. By doing so, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened to change the set value, it is easy to determine whether or not the hold storage is stored in the game control data holding area 109SG150 according to the notification mode of the notification means. Since the clerk at the game hall or the like can recognize, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being inappropriately changed.

  Further, in the third modification, when the opening notification means is provided as described above, it is determined whether or not there is a hold storage in which the variable display result is a big hit in the game control data holding area 109SG150 while the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is being opened. When it is determined that there is a hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit, the notification may be performed in a notification mode different from that in the case where it is determined that there is no hold memory in which the variable display result has a big hit. By doing so, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the clerk at the game hall or the like can easily recognize the presence or absence of the hold memory that causes the variable display result to be a big hit. It is possible to prevent the value from being changed.

  Further, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed during the game as in the third modification, and the display mode of the hold display is changed from the white circle to the white circle as in the second modification. If it is possible to change to a white triangle or a square with a higher expectation of big hits, it is determined whether or not there is a hold display displayed as a white triangle or a square while the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is open, When it is determined that there is a hold display displayed in a white triangle or a quadrangle, the notification may be performed in a notification mode different from that in the case where there is no hold display displayed in a white triangle or a quadrangle. By doing so, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the clerk of the game hall indicates that the hold display is displayed as a white triangle or square having a higher expectation of a big hit than a white circle. And so on can be easily recognized, so that it is possible to prevent setting values from being inappropriately changed.

  In the third modification, the form in which the hold storage is cleared based on a new set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The hold storage may be cleared even when the set value originally set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reset.

  Further, in the third modification, the form in which the hold storage is cleared based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 20-33 (A), when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103, the hold storage is performed. You may clear it. By doing so, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In addition, in the third modification, the form in which the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening 109SG712 are closed based on a new setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. When the change process is executed, the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening 109SG712 may be closed. By doing so, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In addition, in the third modified example, a mode is described in which the notification by the notification means is executed when the game control data holding area 109SG150 has a hold memory while the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened. The present invention is not limited to this, and if there is a hold storage in the game control data holding area 109SG150 while the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, even if it is impossible to set a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Alternatively, a new setting value may be made less likely to be set by providing a more complicated change procedure than when there is no hold storage in the game control data holding area 109SG150 while the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the pending storage from being accidentally cleared by setting a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Modification 4)
Further, in this embodiment, the display monitor 109SG029 is provided with five display units from the first display unit 109SG029A to the fifth display unit 109SG029E, and the first display unit 109SG029A is provided with the second display unit 109SG029B to the fifth display unit 109SG029E. Although the form in which the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base set value are displayed during the display is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 4, as shown in FIG. The display monitor may not be provided with a display unit for displaying the connected ratio, the winning combination, and the set value of the base being displayed. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (B), the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 1 are red, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and the base at the set value 2 are green, By displaying the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 3 in blue, it is possible to grasp which setting value the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base are being displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. It may be easier.

  Further, in the present embodiment and Modification 4, the display monitor 109SG029 can switch the ratio, the winning ratio, and the base at the set value 1 at intervals of 5 seconds, and can operate the display changeover switch 109SG030. For each of these settings, the connection ratio, the combination ratio at the set value 1 and the switching display at the base of 5 seconds are displayed. The connection ratio at the setting value 2, the combination ratio, the switching display at the base of 5 seconds, the connection ratio at the setting value 3, The role ratio and the base can be changed to the switching display at 5-second intervals, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ratio at the set value 1, the ratio at the set value 2, Switching display of the connection ratio at the setting value 3 at 5-second intervals, switching display of the combination ratio at the setting value 1, combination ratio at the setting value 2, and switching of the combination ratio at the setting value 3 at 5-second intervals, Base, setting value In the base, and a switching display in 5 second intervals of the base in the setting value 3, it may be switched for each operation of the display switch 109SG030 a.

(Modification 5)
Further, in the present embodiment, the form in which the security cover 109SG500A is fixed to the outer frame 109SG001a is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 109SG003 side. Is also good. More specifically, as a fifth modification, as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A) and 20-35 (B), a security cover 109SG500B composed of a short piece 109SG500Ba and a long piece 109SG500Bb is attached to, for example, a board case 109SG201. Then, the right end of the long piece 109SG500Bb slides left and right between a covering position covering the right side of the board case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052, and a covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position. Provide movably.

  On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the security cover 109SG500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 109SG201, so that the security cover 109SG500Bc is locked through the through hole 109SG500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 109SG500Bb. The switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 may be made operable. That is, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the security cover 109SG500B (the long piece 109SG500Bb) covers the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 in the horizontal direction with respect to the board case 109SG201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state by restricting the slide movement to the pachinko gaming machine. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the security cover 109SG500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 109SG201 to release the state in which the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 are covered. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be in a state where it can be released from the restricted state (it can be changed to an allowable state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A) and 20-35 (B), when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the security cover 109SG500B has a length L1 that protrudes from the board case 109SG201. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the security cover 109SG500B is slid with respect to the board case 109SG201 so that the security cover 109SG500B is extended to the length L2 from the board case 109SG201. (L2> L1).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (A), when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened by rotating about the predetermined rotating axis, the security cover 109SG500B projects from the board case 109SG201. By sliding the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the board case 109SG201 until the length reaches the length L2 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), the clerk at the amusement arcade operates the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 to play the pachinko game. The setting value of the machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (B), the security cover 109SG500B is attached to the board case 109SG201 until the protrusion dimension from the board case 109SG201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, unless the sliding movement is performed (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the restricted state), the security cover 109SG500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 109SG001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 109SG003. Has become.

  For this reason, in the present first modification, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state. It is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to cover with the changeover switch 109SG052, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 109SG003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, thereby improving security.

  In the state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 109SG500Ba is disposed between the outer frame 109SG001a and the gaming machine frame 109SG003, so that the movement in the left-right direction from the covering position is restricted. However, the security cover 109SG500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state where the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are covered by the security cover 109SG500B is maintained. .

(Modification 6)
Further, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 109SG003 side, as shown in FIGS. 20-37 (A) and 20-38 (B) as a sixth modification, the left end of the security cover 109SG500C is provided on the gaming machine. With the pivot 109SG500Cd facing the vertical direction provided on the back side of the use frame 109SG003 as the center, the covering position covering the right side portion of the board case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052, and rotated from the covering position. It may be pivotally supported so as to be rotatable between the uncovered position. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 109SG500Ca is locked by the locking portion 109SG500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 109SG001a, and the long piece 109SG500Cb is switched to the lock switch 109SG051. The rotation of the switch 109SG052 from the state where the switch 109SG052 is covered from the rear side may be restricted.

  When the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the security switch 109SG500C is rotated around the pivot 109SG500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 109SG201, so that the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are turned on. It is only necessary to release the state covered with and to enable the operation. That is, in the sixth modification, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the rotation is restricted in a state where the security cover 109SG500C (the long piece 109SG500Cb) covers the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is open, the security cover 109SG500C is rotated around the pivot 109SG500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 109SG201 to turn the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the restricted state (can be changed to the allowable state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (A), the security cover 109SG500C in the sixth modification is rotated around the pivot 109SG500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed) so that the game cover is By operating a lock switch 109SG051 or a setting changeover switch 109SG052, a clerk or the like can change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (B), the security cover 109SG500C is rotated clockwise in plan view, and the security switch 109SG500C is used to lock the switch. Unless the 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are covered (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the restricted state), the security cover 109SG500C comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 109SG001a and closes the gaming machine frame 109SG003. It is impossible.

  For this reason, in the sixth modification, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be prevented from closing the gaming machine frame 109SG003 while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. It is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to cover the changeover switch 109SG052, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 109SG003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, thereby improving security.

(Modification 7)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 109SG003 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is not limited thereto. The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by releasing the 109SG003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 109SG003a as described above, a modification 7 is shown in FIGS. 20-39 (A) to 20-39 (C). As described above, the through hole 109SG003b may be formed below the gaming machine frame 109SG003, and the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 may be operated via the through hole 109SG003b.

  When the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 can be operated via the through-hole 109SG003b in this way, a door 109SG003c that can open and close the through-hole 109SG003b is provided, and when the door 109SG003c is closed. The operation of the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 may be restricted. When the door 109SG003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 as shown in FIGS. 20-39 (B) and 20-39 (C), the glass door frame 109SG003a is closed to close the door. Since the 109SG003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 109SG003a and the gaming machine frame 109SG003 so as to be openable and closable, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are operated improperly when the glass door frame 109SG003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented, and security can be improved.

(Explanation about feature 2 of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part 2 of the present embodiment will be described. First, in a gaming machine whose setting value can be changed like the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the setting information (setting value of the setting value) is stored in both the RAM 102 of the main board 11 and the RAM 122 of the effect control board 12. Value) may be stored. However, in such a case, when the setting information is stored in the RAM 122 without any processing, or when a command including the setting information that is not processed in the effect control board 12 is output from the main board 11, the pachinko gaming machine is used. When the set value of 1 is “1” and when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “2” or “3”, the contents of the RAM 122 and the command output from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 are compared. As a result, the value of the set value is easily analyzed. Thus, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 converts the setting value into a setting secret value described later, outputs a command including the setting secret value to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 By converting the setting value specified from the command into a setting corresponding value described later and storing it, it is difficult to specify the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Hereinafter, the characteristic part 2 in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 20 to 40, as a production control command, a setting value designation command (designation) for designating a setting value (changed new setting value) stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 to the production control board 12. Command D1XXH). In the set value designation command, different EXT data is set according to the set secret value after changing the set value.

  In the setting value changing process (see FIG. 20-21), the CPU 103 executes a setting value conversion process for changing the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 to the setting secret value. In the setting value conversion process shown in FIG. 20-41, the CPU 103 first specifies a new setting value (setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102) (109SGS301). Next, the CPU 103 converts the specified set value into a set value secret value (109SGS302).

  In the processing of the 109SGS 302, the CPU 103 may convert the specified setting value into a secret value using a conversion table as shown in FIG. 20-42 (1) or FIG. . FIG. 20-42 (1) is a diagram showing a conversion table A in which a value of 1 having no regularity is set for each set value. When the setting value is converted to the secret value using the conversion table A, for example, when the setting value specified in the processing of the 109SGS301 is “1”, the setting value is converted to the setting secret value “150”. , When the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “2”, the setting value is converted into a setting secret value “41”, and when the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “3”, the setting value is Is converted to the set secret value “34”.

  FIG. 20-42 (2) is a diagram showing a conversion table B in which a value of 1 having a specific regularity is set for each set value. When the set value is converted into the set secret value using the conversion table B, for example, when the set value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “1”, the set value is converted into the set secret value “4”. However, if the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “2”, the setting value is converted to a setting secret value “5”, and if the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “3”, the setting is changed. The value is converted to the set secret value “6”. That is, the conversion table B is a conversion table in which a value obtained by adding “3” to the set value stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 is used as the set secret value.

  When the set value is converted into the set secret value using the conversion table A in the process of 110SG302, the set secret value is converted into a value having no regularity (set secret value) for each set value. When outputting the set value specifying command including the set value specifying command to the effect control board 12, it is possible to make it difficult to analyze and falsify the set value (set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102). On the other hand, when the set value is converted into the set confidential value using the conversion table B in the processing of the 109SGS 302, the set value is converted into a value having a restrictive property (set confidential value) for each set value. In the update process (see FIG. 20-45), it is possible to reduce the processing load when specifying the set value from the set value secret value.

  In the process of 109SGS302, as shown in FIG. 20- (3), the specified set value is converted to a predetermined conversion coefficient (for example, a common multiple of set values “1”, “2”, and “3”). An operation conversion may be performed in which a value multiplied (operation A) or divided (operation B) by a certain “6” or “12” is set as a secret value.

  Further, in the processing of the 109SGS302, as shown in FIG. 20-42 (4), a value obtained by adding (shift A) or subtracting (shift B) a predetermined numerical value to the specified set value is used as a set secret value. A conversion may be performed.

  In the numerical shift conversion in the shift A, for example, when the set value specified in the processing of the 109SGS301 is “1”, the set value is converted into the set secret value “12”, and the set value specified in the processing of the 109SGS301 is converted. Is “2”, the setting value is converted into the setting security value “13”, and if the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “3”, the setting value is converted into the setting security value “14” That is, a value obtained by shifting the set value by +11 may be set as the set secret value. In the numerical value shift conversion in the shift B, for example, when the set value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “1”, the set value is converted into a set secret value “0”, and the set value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is converted. Is “2”, the setting value is converted into the setting secret value “1”, and if the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “3”, the setting value is converted into the setting secret value “2”. That is, a value obtained by shifting the set value by −1 may be set as the set secret value.

  In the processing of 109SGS302, as shown in FIG. 20-42 (4), a bit corresponding to the specified set value is set up (changed from 0 to 1) out of the continuous 8-digit bits (00000000). ) A bit position conversion in which a value is set to a secret value may be performed. Specifically, when the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “1”, the setting value is converted into the setting secret value “00000001”, and when the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “2”. May convert the set value to a set secret value “00000001”, and if the set value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “3”, may convert the set value to a set secret value “00000100” (position A) When the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “1”, the setting value is converted into a setting secret value “10000000”, and when the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “2”, The setting value is converted into the setting secret value “01000000”, and the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is “3”. Some cases may be converted to a set confidential value set value "00100000" (Position B).

  As described above, in the processing of 109SGS302, after the setting value is converted into the setting secret value by any of the methods shown in FIGS. Is performed, and the setting value conversion process ends (S109SGS303). The setting value designation command for which the transmission setting has been performed in S109SGS303 is output to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (S27). As shown in FIGS. 20-43, the setting value conversion process is executed at the timing when the store staff or the like of the game arcade presses the lock switch 109SG051, that is, when the new setting value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. do it.

  Next, an aspect in the case where the effect control board 12 receives the set value designation command will be described. FIG. 20-44 is a flowchart showing the command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing shown in FIGS. 20 to 44, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the storage content of the effect control command reception buffer to receive the effect from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15. It is determined whether or not there is a command (109SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (109SGS221; N), the command analysis processing ends.

  If there is a received command in 109SGS221 (109SGS221; Y), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting port winning designation command, for example, by checking MODE data of the received command (109SGS222). ). When the command is the first start-up winning award designation command (109SGS222; Y), the first waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (109SGS223). For example, in the processing of 109SGS223, a timer initial value that is predetermined in correspondence with the reception waiting time of the first storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit. .

  If the received command is not the first start opening winning designation command in 109SGS222 (109SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (109SGS224). If the command is the second start-up opening prize designation command (109SGS224; Y), the second waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (109SGS225). For example, in the processing of 109SGS225, a timer initial value that is predetermined in correspondence with the reception waiting time of the second storage count notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command in 109SGS224 (109SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (109SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designating command in 109SGS226 (109SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in 109SGS227 (109SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (109SGS228). When the command is the first pending storage number notification command (109SGS228; Y), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer (109SGS229).

  When the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command in 109SGS228 (109SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (109SGS230). If the command is the second reserved storage number notification command (109SGS230; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the clocking operation by the command reception control timer (109SGS231).

  Then, after executing one of the processes of 109SGS229 and 109SGS231, the display undetermined flag of the stored entry is set to "1" indicating that the pending display mode is undetermined (109SGS232).

  If the received command is a symbol designating command in 109SGS226 (109SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in 109SGS227 (S227; Y), or one of the processes of 109SGS223, 109SGS225, and 109SGS232 is executed. After that, the received command is stored in the head of the free area in the start winning receiving command buffer 194A (not shown) (109SGS233), and the process returns to 109SGS221.

  Note that when the command for notifying the number of retained storages (the first notification command for the number of reserved storages or the second notification command for the number of reserved storages) is received together with the change start command (the first variation start command or the second variation start command), The number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize can be sequentially stored from the head of the free area in the start prize receiving command buffer 194A.

  If the received command is not the second reserved storage number notification command in 109SGS230 (109SGS230; N), it is determined whether the received command is a set value designation command (109SGS232). If the received command is a set value designation command (109SGS232; Y), a set value update process for storing the set value specified from the set value designation command in the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is executed (S109SGS233). ), And returns to 109SGS21. If the received command is not a set value designation command in 109SGS232 (109SGS232; N), the setting according to other received commands is performed (109SGS234), and the process returns to 109SGS221.

  FIG. 20-45 is a flowchart showing the setting value update processing in the command analysis processing. In the setting value update process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies a setting value (a setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102) from the received setting value designation command (110SGS311). In the process of the 110SGS 311, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the set secret value from the received set value specifying command, and sets the set secret value in a method corresponding to the method in which the CPU 103 converts the set value to the set secret value. What is necessary is just to specify a set value from a secret value.

  For example, when the CPU 103 converts the set value into the set secret value using the conversion table A, if the set secret value specified from the set value designation command is “150”, the set value is specified as “1”, If the setting security value specified from the setting value specifying command is “41”, the setting value is specified to “2”. If the setting security value specified from the setting value specifying command is “34”, the setting value is “3”. Should be specified. Further, when the CPU 103 converts the set value into the set secret value using the conversion table B, if the set secret value specified from the set value designation command is “4”, the set value is specified as “1”, If the setting secret value specified from the setting value specifying command is “5”, the setting value is specified as “2”, and if the setting secret value specified from the setting value specifying command is “6”, the setting value is “3”. Should be specified.

  When the CPU 103 converts the set value into the set secret value using the operation A as the operation conversion, the value obtained by dividing the set secret value specified from the set value designation command by a predetermined conversion coefficient is specified as the set value. I just need. When the CPU 103 converts the set value to the set secret value using the operation B as the operation conversion, the set value is specified by multiplying the set secret value specified from the set value designation command by a predetermined conversion coefficient. Just fine.

  When the CPU 103 converts the set value to the set secret value using the shift A as the numerical value shift conversion, if the set secret value specified from the set value designation command is “12”, the set value is specified to “1”. If the setting secret value specified from the setting value specifying command is “13”, the setting value is specified as “2”. If the setting secret value specified from the setting value specifying command is “14”, the setting value is “ 3 ". When the CPU 103 converts the set value into the set secret value using the shift B as the numerical shift conversion, if the set secret value specified from the set value designation command is “0”, the set value is specified as “1”. If the setting secret value specified from the setting value specifying command is “1”, the setting value is specified as “2”, and if the setting secret value specified from the setting value specifying command is “2”, the setting value is “2”. 3 ".

  When the CPU 103 converts the set value to the set secret value using the position A as the bit position conversion, if the set secret value specified from the set value designation command is “00000001”, the set value is specified to “1”. If the setting secret value specified from the setting value specifying command is “00000010”, the setting value is specified to “2”, and if the setting secret value specified from the setting value specifying command is “00000100”, the setting value is “ 3 ". When the CPU 103 converts the set value into the set secret value using the position B as the bit position conversion, if the set secret value specified from the set value designation command is “10000000”, the set value is specified as “1”. If the setting secret value specified from the setting value specifying command is “01000000”, the setting value is specified to “2”, and if the setting secret value specified from the setting value specifying command is “00100000”, the setting value is “ 3 ".

  Next, effect control CPU 120 converts the setting value specified in 110SGS 311 into a setting corresponding value of 1 corresponding to the specified setting value (110SGS 312), and converts the setting corresponding value stored in RAM 122 into the converted setting corresponding value. The value is updated and stored, and the set value update process ends (110SGS313).

  In the processing of 110SGS312 and 110SGS313, the effect control CPU 120 sets the set value using, for example, the conversion table shown in FIG. 20-42, operation conversion, numerical shift conversion, bit position conversion, and the like. What is necessary is just to convert it into a different value (setting corresponding value) and update and store it in the RAM 122. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 converts the setting value specified from the setting value designation command received from the main board 11 into the setting corresponding value without updating and storing the setting value in the RAM 122 as the setting value or the setting secret value. By updating and storing in the RAM 122, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is analyzed and the possibility that a value different from the set value is updated and stored in the RAM 122.

  Note that the method of the effect control CPU 120 converting the setting value into the setting corresponding value in the 110SGS 312 may be the same as the method in which the CPU 103 converts the setting value into the setting confidential value in the 110SGS302 of the setting value conversion process. , May be different.

  Further, when the value (setting corresponding value) corresponding to the set value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as described above, the effect control CPU 120 waits for the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be changed. It is possible to execute a set value suggestion effect indicating a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 over a predetermined period (for example, until 100 fluctuation displays are performed or until one hour elapses). Is also good. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-46, the image display device 5 is turned on for the predetermined period described above after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on in accordance with the setting corresponding value stored in the RAM 122. A background effect (setting value suggestion effect) in which spring, summer, and winter background images are displayed at different rates as background images may be executed.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines an image to be displayed as a background image on the image display device 5 as a setting value suggestive effect after spring is turned on in the pachinko gaming machine 1, either spring, summer, or winter. At this time, when the setting corresponding value stored in RAM 122 is a value corresponding to the setting value “1”, effect control CPU 120 determines the image to be displayed as the background image as a winter image at a rate of 80%. Then, a spring image is determined at a rate of 15%, and a summer image is determined at a rate of 5%. If the setting corresponding value stored in the RAM 122 is a value corresponding to the setting value “2”, the image to be displayed as the background image is determined as a winter image at a rate of 60%, and at a rate of 30%. A spring image is determined, and a summer image is determined at a rate of 10%. If the setting corresponding value stored in the RAM 122 is a value corresponding to the setting value “3”, the image to be displayed as the background image is determined as a winter image at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 45%. A spring image is determined, and a summer image is determined at a rate of 15%.

  In this embodiment, the setting value 1 is the most advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting value 3 is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player. Until the predetermined period elapses, the player can pay attention to the image displayed as the background image of the image display device 5, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, an example in which the image displayed as the background image of the image display device 5 is different as the setting value suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value suggestion effect is not limited to this. As an effect, a pachinko game is displayed by displaying a specific character, a line, or the like on the image display device 5 during a variable display, a big hit game, the end timing of the big hit game, a variable display after a specific number of times (for example, 500 times), and the like. The effect may indicate a setting value set in the device 1. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the set value suggestion effect is executed until a predetermined period elapses from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value suggestion effect may be an effect that can be executed regardless of the period since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 converts the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a set secret value using a method such as a conversion table, arithmetic conversion, numerical shift conversion, bit position conversion, and the like in the setting value conversion process. Although the form of conversion is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. In the setting value conversion processing, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are converted into these conversion tables, arithmetic conversions, and numerical shift conversions. Alternatively, the secret value may be converted into the set secret value using a method other than the bit position conversion, or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be converted into the secret value using two or more methods.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 converts the set value specified from the set value designation command in the set value update process using a method such as a conversion table, arithmetic conversion, numerical shift conversion, bit position conversion, and the like. Although a form in which the setting value is converted to a setting corresponding value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. , May be converted to a setting corresponding value using a method other than numerical shift conversion and bit position conversion, or a setting value specified from a setting value designation command may be converted to a setting corresponding value using two or more methods. Good.

  In the present embodiment, when a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the CPU 103 outputs a set value designation command including the set secret value obtained by converting the set value to the effect control board 12. Although the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a mode in which the set value specified from the set value specifying command is converted into a set corresponding value and stored in the RAM 122, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. When a new setting value is set to 1, only one of the conversion of the setting value by the CPU 103 to the setting confidential value and the conversion of the setting value by the effect control CPU 120 to the setting corresponding value is executed. Is also good. When the CPU 103 does not execute the conversion of the setting value into the setting confidential value, the CPU 103 outputs a setting value specifying command including the setting value to the effect control board 12, and the effect controlling CPU 120 outputs the setting value specifying command. The setting value specified from the command may be converted into a setting corresponding value and stored in the RAM 122. In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the change of the setting value to the setting corresponding value, the CPU 103 outputs a setting value designation command including the setting secret value obtained by converting the setting value to the effect control board 12, and The control CPU 120 may store the set value specified from the set value designation command in the RAM 122 as it is.

  As described above, in pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (H), effect control CPU 120 performs the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestion effect, and the second effect. The super-reach C and the super-reach D can be executed as a suggestion effect, and the super-reach C and the super-reach D can be executed when the super-reach C and the super-reach D are performed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach C or Super Reach D is notified from the start of the effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the introduction portion of super reach A and super reach B, a super reach effect (for example, displaying an enemy character, By performing the effect that suggests the character), the effect of the effect is improved, and the player can pay attention to the effect.

This embodiment also includes the second invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a setting value designation command capable of specifying a setting value is transmitted to an effect control board for performing an effect, and the set value is transmitted to the effect control board. Notifying and controlling the setting suggestion effect, the effect control board that controls these setting suggestion effects is a board that controls the effect rather than controlling the progress of the game, thereby controlling the progress of the game. Since it is easier to take out the board from the case etc. and analyze it than the game control board to do, if the set value stored in the effect control board is tampered, inappropriate setting suggestion effects are performed There was a problem that there was fear. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 20-21) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
Effect control means for controlling the effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the morning effect background effect (setting value suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 20-46) When,
With
The game control means includes, as the control information capable of specifying the set value, set value control information including a secret value obtained by converting the set value, which is a numerical value different from the set value set by the set means (for example, , A setting value designation command) (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the command control process (S27) after the execution of the 110SG303 process of the setting value conversion process),
The effect control means stores a confidential value included in the setting value control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes 110SG313 processing of the setting value update processing shown in FIG. 20-45). In addition to the execution part, it is possible to execute an effect relating to the set value specified from the confidential value (for example, until one hour elapses after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or 100 times of fluctuation display is executed. Part that performs background effects (setting value suggestion effects) until morning
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stored set values from being falsified.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the second invention,
The game control means executes the conversion using a conversion table in which the set value and the secret value are associated with each other (for example, when the CPU 103 executes the 110SGS302 of the set value conversion process shown in FIG. 20-41). A part that converts a set value into a set secret value using the conversion table A shown in FIG. 20-42 (1) or the conversion table B shown in FIG. 20-42 (2))
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being falsified while reducing the conversion processing load.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the second invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by performing an operation using a predetermined conversion coefficient on the set value (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the set value conversion processing shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103, A part that converts a set value to a set secret value using the operation conversion (operation A or operation B) shown in FIG. 20- (3))
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being falsified while reducing the data capacity required for conversion.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the second invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by setting a specific bit value corresponding to the set value to 1 (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the set value conversion processing shown in FIG. A part for converting a set value into a set secret value using the bit position conversion (position A or position B) shown in −42 (5))
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being falsified while reducing the data capacity required for conversion.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by shifting the set value by a predetermined number (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the set value conversion processing shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103, FIG. 20-42 (4) The part that converts the set value to the set secret value using the numerical shift conversion (shift A or shift B) shown in (1)
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being falsified while reducing the data capacity required for conversion.

This embodiment also includes the third invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a setting value designation command capable of specifying a setting value is transmitted to an effect control board for performing an effect, and the set value is transmitted to the effect control board. Notifying and controlling the setting suggestion effect, the effect control board that controls these setting suggestion effects is a board that controls the effect rather than controlling the progress of the game, thereby controlling the progress of the game. Since it is easier to take out the board from the case etc. and analyze it than the game control board to do, if the set value stored in the effect control board is tampered, inappropriate setting suggestion effects are performed There was a problem that there was fear. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 20-21) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
Effect control means for controlling the effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a process control process shown in FIG. 5);
With
The game control means is capable of transmitting set value control information (for example, a set value designation command) including the set value as the control information (for example, the CPU 103 executes a command after executing the processing of 110SG303 of the set value conversion processing). A part for executing the control process (S27)),
The effect control means converts a set value included in the set value control information transmitted from the game control means into a secret value different from the set value and stores it (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Is a part that converts the setting value specified from the setting value designation command into a setting corresponding value in the 110SG313 processing of the setting value update processing shown in FIG. 20-45, and stores the setting value specified from the stored secret value. (For example, a background effect (setting value suggestion effect) until one hour elapses after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on or until 100 fluctuation displays are executed. Part to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stored set values from being falsified.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the third invention,
The game control means executes the conversion using a conversion table in which the set value and the secret value are associated with each other (for example, when the CPU 103 executes the 110SGS302 of the set value conversion process shown in FIG. 20-41). A part that converts a set value into a set secret value using the conversion table A shown in FIG. 20-42 (1) or the conversion table B shown in FIG. 20-42 (2))
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being falsified while reducing the conversion processing load.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the third invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by performing an operation using a predetermined conversion coefficient on the set value (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the set value conversion processing shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103, A part that converts a set value to a set secret value using the operation conversion (operation A or operation B) shown in FIG. 20- (3))
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being falsified while reducing the data capacity required for conversion.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the third invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by setting a specific bit value corresponding to the set value to 1 (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the set value conversion processing shown in FIG. A part for converting a set value into a set secret value using the bit position conversion (position A or position B) shown in −42 (5))
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being falsified while reducing the data capacity required for conversion.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the third invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by shifting the set value by a predetermined number (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the set value conversion processing shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103, FIG. 20-42 (4) The part that converts the set value to the set secret value using the numerical shift conversion (shift A or shift B) shown in (1)
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being falsified while reducing the data capacity required for conversion.

  As described above, the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention, the present invention will be described. included.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, a form in which a gaming machine frame 109SG003 that can open and close the opening of the outer frame 109SG001a and a glass door frame 109SG003a that can open and close the front surface of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 are used as the opening and closing body has been exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes, for example, a front door capable of opening and closing a front opening of a housing like a slot machine. In addition, not only a device that can be opened and closed by turning, but also a device that can be opened and closed by sliding and detaching.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are applied as the operation unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 Either one of them may be used, or another operation unit having a different operation mode (for example, a pull operation, a push operation, a rotation operation, or the like) of another switch, button, lever, dial, touch sensor, or the like may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the security cover 109SG500A, 109SG500B, and 109SG500C are applied as the regulating member. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if it is not a member to be covered, the shape, size, material, and the like can be variously changed as long as the operation of the operation unit can be regulated. More specifically, for example, instead of covering the operation unit, the operation unit may be in contact with the operation unit to regulate the operation of the operation unit.

  In the above-described embodiment, the security covers 109SG500A, 109SG500B, and 109SG500C as the regulating members only need to be in a state where the operation is difficult by covering the operation unit in the restricted state of the operation unit, and the operation is not necessarily performed. It does not have to be.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the setting switching main body having the operation unit such as the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switching switch 109SG052 is mounted on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The main substrate 11 may be provided on a separate substrate, may be accommodated in a case other than the substrate case 109SG201, or may not be accommodated in the substrate case 109SG201.

  In the modified examples 5 and 6, the security covers 109SG500B and 109SG500C as the restricting members have exemplified the form in which the gaming machine frame 109SG003 cannot be closed in the uncovered position, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the game machine frame 109SG003 is closed. For example, an interlocking mechanism that interlocks with the game machine frame 109SG003 closing operation is provided so that the security covers 109SG500B and 109SG500C return from the uncovered position to the covered position. Is also good.

  In the above embodiment, the board case 109SG201 provided with the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is provided at a position where operation becomes difficult when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, a place other than the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a glass door frame at the front of the gaming machine frame 109SG003). 109SG003a or the outer frame 109SG001a).

  Further, in the above embodiment, it is possible to change the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the fact that both the clear switch (see FIG. 3) and the lock switch 109SG051 are ON (the setting change process is performed). (Execution), but the present invention is not limited to this, and other processing may be executed according to the combination of ON / OFF of the clear switch and the lock switch 109SG051. For example, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 109SG051 is ON, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed (the setting confirmation process is executed), and the clear switch is ON. When the lock switch 109SG051 is OFF, the data stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and when both the clear switch and the lock switch 109SG051 are OFF, restoration processing from power interruption (restoration processing shown in FIG. 3) Should be executed. During the execution of the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing described above, the display of the change of the special symbol and the firing of the game ball, various lotteries such as whether the result of the change display is a big hit, the big hit type, the payout of the prize ball, etc. It is only necessary to control the game to a game stop state in which no processing is executed.

  In the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. At the same time, one game is ended by deriving a variable display result on an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each of which can be identified, and according to the variable display result derived on the image display device. The present invention is also applicable to slot machines in which a prize can be generated.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment is the same as the above-described characteristic portion 31AK, and thus the description is omitted. As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the main substrate 11 in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 122SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 122SG051 for switching between a setting change state in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed and a setting confirmation state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be checked. And a setting changeover switch 122SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later in the setting change state.

  The setting switch main body provided with an operation unit operable by the player, such as the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switch 122SG052, is housed in the board case 122SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switch 122SG052. Is exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear left portion of the substrate case 122SG201 so that the device can be operated without opening the substrate case 122SG201.

  Since the board case 122SG201 having the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 3 with the gaming machine frame 3 closed. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 by using it. Further, since the lock switch 122SG051 requires the operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like at a game arcade, only a store clerk having the setting key can operate the lock switch 122SG051. The lock switch 122SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation) by using a setting key. In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are exemplified as separate keys, but these keys may be shared by one key.

  Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is opened. This is the front when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 And an LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 21-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature unit 3 according to the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 21-3 (A) is an example, and another command form may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 21A, the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (B), a result of determining whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit”, or “small hit” (predetermined result) ), And different EXT data are set according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the big hit type when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” (big hit type determination result).

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 21B, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “losing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , Time-saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the generated error (abnormal). In the error (abnormal) designation command, for example, the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormal) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormal) has been determined to have occurred on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening, which notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening and the notification command after opening of the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up by clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation of changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the operation of confirming the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in a setting change state) wp. The command E106H is a setting value confirmation end notification command for notifying that the setting value confirmation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 103. It comprises a random number circuit 104 for performing, an input / output port (I / O) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes and temporarily stores various variable data in the RAM 102, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 Reading operation, CPU 103 receiving an input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, CPU 103 outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  FIG. 21D is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 21-4, in the characteristic portion 3 of this embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for general-purpose display result determination, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 by software update using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 21-4, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 21-5 shows a fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the fluctuation display result is “losing”, the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is “big hit”. In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a “non-reach loss fluctuation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in a loss variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variation display result is “loss”. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

  The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 21-5, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is performed in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the super reach variation patterns, super reach α and super reach β It is set shorter than. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super-reach variation pattern in which the super-reach effect such as super-reach α and super-reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super-reach effect of super-reach β is executed is The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach are set so that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” so that the big hit expectation becomes higher. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of the big hit.

In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, and the like. after the previously determined, instead of determining the variation pattern to run from fluctuation patterns belonging to the type that the determined, using only random numbers MR3 for variation pattern determined without determining these types However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the variation pattern type is determined. from determined from the random number value for judgment before the type of variation patterns, be determined variation pattern that run from fluctuation patterns belonging to the type that the determined There.

  Also, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-5, an example is shown in which the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern becomes the normal reach loss, and when the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the set value is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and the non-reach is lost, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed three times and the variation pattern becomes the super reach loss.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to a game control program, various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 21-6 and FIG. 21-7 prepared for the CPU 103 to make various types of determinations and decisions. Further, the ROM 101 has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. And a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 21-6 (A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 21-6 (B), and FIG. -6 (C), a display result determination table (set value 3), a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 21-7 (A), and a big hit type determination shown in FIG. 21-7 (B). In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), a large hit variation pattern determination table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a loss variation pattern determination table, a general figure display result determination table (not shown), and a general figure variation pattern determination table (not shown) ) Etc. are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to a set value, a winning probability (winning rate) of a big hit and a small hit is changed. Has become. The set value has three stages of 1 to 3, 1 is the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreases as the value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the set value 1 is the smallest value, which is the most disadvantageous value to the game arcade side, and the larger the value becomes in the order of 2, 3, the more advantageous the game value side is.

  FIGS. 21-6 (A) to 21-6 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special maps.

  As shown in FIG. 21-6 (A) to FIG. 21-6, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is the probable change state (high accuracy state), the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state) Are assigned to the special map display result of "big hit". Thereby, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) is set, the special map display result is set to the "big hit" to control the big hit gaming state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, 1/99 when the setting value is 1, 1/150 when the setting value is 2, and 1/200 when the setting value is 3). In comparison, the probability that it is determined that the special map display result is controlled to the big hit game state as “big hit” is higher (in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/50, and the set value is (1/99 for 2 and 1/150 for 3). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable state (high-precision state), the probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state compared to the normal state or the time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state so that is increased.

  In each of the display result determination tables, the special figure display result is set to “small hit” depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state (low-probability state) or a probable change state (high-precision state). The determination values are assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game is the same (for example, 1/50 when the set value is 1, 1/99 when the set value is 2, 1/99, the set value Is 1/200 if is 3.)

  Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the special figure display result is set to “big hit” or “small hit”, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a high probability of being determined to be controlled to the gaming state, the special value display result is "big hit" or "small hit" when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "big hit" or "small hit". The judgment value is assigned so that the probability of being determined when the state is controlled is low (big hit probability and small hit probability: setting value 1> setting value 2> setting value 3).

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines that the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) to 21-6 (C). If any one of the hit determination values matches, the special symbol is determined to be a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). If MR1 matches any one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) to 21-6 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is set to the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) to 21-6 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to a big hit gaming state, but to determine whether to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hitting game state. However, stopping in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol.

  Note that, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, in each of the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of which display result determination table is used, the winning probability per small hit is the same (regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1). It may be.

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. However, a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table are separately provided for each set value, and it is individually determined whether or not the fluctuation display result is a big hit or a small hit. Is also good. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) to 21-6 (C), a judgment value is assigned to each small hit in each display result judgment table, but as shown in FIG. 21-6 (C). In the display result determination table (display result determination table referred to when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3), the determination value may not be assigned to the small hit. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

  In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as settable values for the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

  FIGS. 21-7 (A) and 21-7 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for a first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for a second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, FIG. 21-7 (A) determines the big hit type by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol change display is performed). It is a table in the case of doing. In addition, FIG. 21-7 (B) determines the big hit type by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

  The big hit type determination table indicates that the type of the big hit is one of the big hits A to C based on the hit type determining random number (MR2) when it is determined that the variation display result is a big hit symbol. Is a table referred to in order to determine

  Here, the big hit type in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 21-8. In the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, as the big hit type, a big hit A (also referred to as a non-probable variable big hit) in which only the time-saving control is executed after the big hit gaming state ends and the state shifts to the low-probability high-base state, After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and a big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a big change big hit) which shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

  The jackpot game state by the "big hit A" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) for changing the special variable prize ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called ten rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time-saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment), or The game ends when the big hit game state is reached before the figure game is executed.

  On the other hand, the high-precision control and the time-saving control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the big hit game state is ended. Therefore, when the jackpot that has recurred is the jackpot B or the jackpot C, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed without going through the normal state. , A so-called extended-villa state.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of this embodiment, a mode in which three types of big hits A to big hit C are provided as big hit types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may provide below kind, or four or more kinds.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 149 are assigned to jackpot B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B. , 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is finished is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game is finished. Of the big hit B and the big hit C in which both the positive change and the positive change control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 3 when the payout rate is the lowest.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C (the judgment value is not assigned to the big hit B). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the big hit B and the big hit C in which both the positive change and the positive change control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 3 when the payout rate is the lowest.

  In the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, if the change special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In the case where the determination rate of the jackpot type is different depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, even when the fluctuation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, a case where the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B may be provided. .

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is the big hit varies depending on the set value, so that the gaming entertainment can be improved. It has become.

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this. The determination may be performed using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous to the player (the bigger hit probability and the smaller hit probability are increased, and the big hit C as the big hit type is determined. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous the player may be. .

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the gaming property itself does not change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming properties may be changed according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is set to 1/320, and the probability change state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable prize ball device 7 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, the game state after the end of the big hit game is controlled to the certain change state, while the ratio of the game balls passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the variation special figure (so-called V). If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during the high base (during the time reduction control). Ball is specially variable A predetermined switch provided in the sphere device 7 may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing. Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as 1 to 3, the gaming property is the same, but the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Furthermore, when changing the playability according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable prize ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes the predetermined region, Used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the fact that a game ball has passed the predetermined switch, It may be used as a switch for controlling to a big hit game state.

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a variation pattern determination table for a big hit which is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and the variation display result is “small hit”. A variation pattern determination table for a big hit that is used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for a loss that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “losed” is prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 21-9 (A) and FIG. 21-9 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table (the jackpot A ) And a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is for jackpot B and jackpot C are prepared in advance. A) and the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C) include the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and the super reach β big hit For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined value within a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take A random value is assigned as a judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 21-9 (A), in the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, Up to 300 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, from 301 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and from 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and the fluctuation pattern of 826 to 997 is allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 400 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 401 to 850 is The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned, and 851 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 21-9 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for the jackpot B and the jackpot C), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of the MR3 is 0 to 997. , 0 to 100 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 101 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 351 to 997 are assigned to It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 150 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 151 to 450 The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Further, when the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit.

  As described above, when the jackpot A is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. And lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the superreach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may determine that “big hit B” or “big hit C” may be obtained. Expectations can be increased.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) is the determination value. Assigned as. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21C, even if the set value is any of “1”, “2”, and “3” in the small hit variation pattern determination table, MR3 Of the determination value range 0 to 997, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as small hit variation patterns. With the setting values “1”, “2”, and “3”, the small hit variation pattern may be determined at a different rate from the plurality of variation patterns.

  Further, the loss variation pattern determination table includes a loss variation pattern determination table A, which is used when the number of stored games is one or less in a low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time saving control, and a low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and variation for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned to the variation pattern of β loss (PA2-3) as the determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 21-10 (A), when the set value is “1” in the variation pattern determination table for losing A (for one or less low base medium total pending storage), the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 0 to 997, the range from 0 to 350 is assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and the range from 351 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, out of the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach, which correspond to the total number of stored storages of 2 to 4, respectively. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 21-10 (B), in the loss variation pattern determination table B (for low base medium total pending storage number of 2 to 4), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 0 to 997 of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach that correspond to the total number of stored memories of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range in which a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 21-10 (C), in the loss variation pattern determination table C (for five or more low base medium total pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 0 to 997, the range from 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and the range from 451 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control are shown. PA2-2) and a variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

  As shown in FIG. 21-10 (D), in the loss variation pattern determination table D (for high-base medium use), when the set value is “1”, out of the determination value range 0 to 997 of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α. Loss variation patterns (PA2-2) are assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  As described above, when the loss variation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, and It becomes lower in the order of 3. Further, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the variation values of 701 to 900 among the determination values are the variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and the variation values of 901 to 997 are the variation of the super reach β loss regardless of the variation pattern determination table. When the fluctuation display result is a loss, the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined at a common decision ratio regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

  Note that the “common determination ratio” in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment means that the determination ratio is completely the same at different set values (this embodiment), and that the determination ratio is different at different set values. (E.g., the setting ratio of the super-reach variation pattern is different by about 1% between the set values 1 to 3).

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, an example is described in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this. If the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratios of all fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Exemplifies the same form regardless of the set value that is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the fluctuation display result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of May be the same irrespective of the set value in which only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss is set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Exemplifies a mode in which the set value is the same regardless of the set value that is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the set value, the change ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, a mode in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern is different according to the set setting value is illustrated, but it is set. Depending on the set value that is present, one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns may be present among the non-reach fluctuation patterns and the normal reach fluctuation patterns. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value that has been set means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific variation pattern is 100%. It also includes the determination of the percentage.

  The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation of the non-reach loss is smaller than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The variation time of the pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see FIG. 21-5). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, and the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of four. Sometimes, when the start winning is made, it becomes difficult to cause useless starting winning in which the holding memory is not made, and when the number of the holding memories is reduced, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss without shortening the fluctuation time is long. By determining PA1-1), it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that the variable display is not performed because the variable display time is lengthened.

  Also, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 21-10 (A) to 21-10 (C), the variation is determined by using a loss variation Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation pattern may be determined using a different loss pattern determination table depending on the number of stored special symbols and the variation display of the second special symbol (in the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the super reach loss The range of random numbers assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the losing probability are different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the super-reach losing variation pattern (the super-reach losing variation pattern) (Appearance rate) differs according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, an example is described in which the rate at which the fluctuation display is performed in the super reach loss fluctuation pattern differs according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, The present invention is not limited to this. Considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the fluctuation display is performed at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the super reach loss. It may be executed in a variation pattern.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 21A may be a backup RAM partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 102 is retained for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). You. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special figure holding storage unit, a general figure holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, a game control counter, and the like. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

  The first special map holding storage unit stores the special map which has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has been generated. The storage unit stores the game (special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) reservation data. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the first start winning opening and establishes the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for fluctuation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on The storage is performed until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure game is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will be made.

  The second special map holding storage unit stores a special winning start (second starting winning) when a game ball passes (enters) a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, but the starting has not yet started. It stores the hold data of the figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the hold number in the second starting winning opening and establishes the second starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the random number value MR1 for fluctuation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. It is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will be made.

  It should be noted that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening may be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The general figure holding storage unit stores the general figure holding information that has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 yet, even though the game ball passing through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls passed through the pass gate, and based on the passing of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result determination from the random number circuit 104 and the like. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 and the like are stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state.

  The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random number value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, a game control main process in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 21-11 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (122SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (122SGSa0022). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is ON, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014. If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa003; N), it is further determined whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (122SGSa004). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is ON. When the backup flag is OFF and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; N),

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; Y), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (122SGSa005). . In 122SGSa005, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on a parity bit and a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (122SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa005; Y), the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting until the effect control board 12 is activated (122SGSa006). Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has expired (122SGSa008). If the effect control board activation start waiting timer has not expired (122SGSa008; N), 122SGSa007 is executed again, and waits until the effect control board 12 is activated. When the effect control board activation start waiting timer is out (122SGSa008; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON.

  If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa008; Y), a set value confirmation process for displaying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed, and the salesclerk of the game hall displays the set value. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in a state where the user can confirm the set value by visually checking the monitor 122SG029 (setting change state) (122SGSa010). When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa008; N) or after executing the set value confirmation process, the process proceeds to 122SGSa011.

  In 122SGSa011, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in a state before the power cut-off, transmits a command at the time of recovery including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021. (122SGSa013).

  In 122SGSa014, the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting until the effect control board 12 is activated. Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decremented by 1 (122SGSa015), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has expired (122SGSa016). When the effect control board activation start waiting timer has not expired (122SGSa016; N), 122SGSa015 is executed again, and the operation control board 12 waits until the activation. When the effect control board activation start waiting timer is out (122SGSa016; Y), the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) for clearing the contents of the RAM 102, and then turns the lock switch 122SG051 ON. It is determined whether or not there is (122SGSa019).

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa019; N), the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start, transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021.

  Further, when the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa019; Y), the CPU 103 executes a setting change process (122SGSa020) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and proceeds to 122SGSa021.

  In 122SGSa021, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104. Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (122SGSa022), and an interrupt is permitted (122SGSa023). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 21-12 is a flowchart illustrating the setting value confirmation processing executed by the CPU 103. In the setting value confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa031), and is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 21-13 (B)). The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa032). Then, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033). If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033; N), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing 122SGSa033.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa051; N), the CPU 103 ends the display of the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa034) and sends a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12. Then, the setting value confirmation processing is completed (122SGSa035).

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, since the setting confirmation state ends (the setting value confirmation processing ends), the state becomes the same state as when the apparatus is started by the normal hot start. The command transmitted to the effect control board 12 may be a hot start notification command.

  FIG. 21A is a flowchart illustrating the RAM clear processing executed by the CPU 103. In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041). If the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041; N), it is further determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042). If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; Y), the CPU 103 specifies the second address from the top in the RAM 102 and proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa043).

  On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 by specifying the top address in the RAM 102 (122SGSa044).

  In 122SGSa045, the CPU 103 sets (stores) “00H” at the designated address. In particular, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), "00H" is set to the address F000, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 automatically sets the set value. 1 is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the specified address is the last address (FXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa047), and if the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). ; Y) ends the RAM clearing process.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to the respective storage areas in the RAM 102 in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment. Of these storage areas, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the top of the RAM 102 is described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, other addresses (F002, F003, etc.) include clear switch backup information that can specify whether or not the clear switch was ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, as well as special figure storage and general figure storage. Game information including storage, values of various counters, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored.

  In other words, the RAM clear processing in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment means that when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102 and there is backup data, the addresses (F001 to FXXX) except the address (F000) storing the set value are stored. ) Stores “00H” in the RAM 102 to clear data other than the set value. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or when there is no backup data, “00H” is stored in all the addresses (F000 to FXXX) in the RAM 102. Is a process of clearing all the data including the set value by storing.

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the set value is stored in the first address F000 of the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102. Is also good. When the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102 as described above, when executing the RAM clear processing shown in FIG. 21A, the address immediately before the last address of the RAM 102 is used as a data clear address. , And "00H" may be stored sequentially from the address F000 to the address immediately before.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, an example is shown in which data other than the set value of the RAM 102 is cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, only the game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment) is cleared. It may be.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the form in which the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. A process of storing or reading clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 by storing it in a register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, any of an accumulator that is the center of operation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, and a general-purpose register). May be omitted, and the processing load on the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the clear switch backup information is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent other information (data) from being overwritten by the processing.

  FIG. 21-14 is a flowchart illustrating the setting change process executed by the CPU 103. In the setting change processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). The set value change start notification command may be transmitted immediately before the start of the set value change process (at the timing when the lock switch 122SG051 is determined to be ON in 122SGSa018). Then, the setting value stored in the address F000 (see FIG. 21-13 (B)) in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa053).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting switch 122SG052 has been operated (122SGSa054). When the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is a setting value that is one step less favorable for the player than “1”, is set as a temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “2”, the setting value “3” which is one step less favorable for the player than “2” is provisionally set. It is stored as a set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored as a temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the RAM 102 at the address F001 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). If the setting switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 122SGSa054 to 122SGSa056 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

  When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 stores the set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 in the address F000. That is, the CPU 103 stores the set value stored at the address F001 (the provisional set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029) at the address F000, thereby changing the set value stored at the address F001 to the actual set value. (Change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 and a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, and ends the setting change process. (122SGSa059, 122SGSa060).

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the setting change processing is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value change end notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 within the game control main process (immediately after the end of the setting change process).

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by turning off the lock switch 122SG051 (the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102). Is stored in the address F000), but the present invention is not limited to this. The game ball can be placed in the starting winning opening, the clear switch can be operated, the lock switch 122SG051 can be pushed, and the like. After the operation of (1) is executed, the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off, so that a new set value may be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Also, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start or started in a setting change state, a cold start notification command or a setting value change start is issued to the effect control board 12. Although the form in which the RAM clear processing is executed before the notification command is transmitted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be executed after transmitting the command or the setting value change start notification command.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the RAM clear processing is executed before the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and executes the RAM clearing process again after the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed (other than the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). May be cleared). By doing so, it is possible to prevent such a problem that a game is started while illegal data is stored in the RAM.

  Furthermore, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the common RAM clearing process (122SGSa017) is executed after the execution of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of starting with the cold start and the case of starting the pachinko gaming machine with the setting changed. Although a mode according to the state (a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, or a setting value change end notification command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a setting change state, a command (a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, a setting value change After transmitting the end notification command) to the effect control board 12, the common RAM clear processing is executed. It may be.

  Next, a game control timer interrupt process in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 21-15, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (122SGS020) in a game control timer interrupt process, and then executes a process from a switch process (S21) to a command control process (S27). . As shown in FIGS. 21 to 16, in the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value from a power supply board (not shown). Is determined (122SGSa051). If there is no input of the power-off signal (122SGSa051; N), the process is terminated. (122SGS053), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (122SGS053). Then, after creating check data to be used for restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS054), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Next, the effect control main processing in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 21-17 is a flowchart illustrating the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (122SGS401a), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets a CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Circuit) register setting. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (122SGS401b). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation is executed.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to a reception waiting period of a command transmitted from main board 11 (122SGS402). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGS403), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404). If the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404; N), the processes of 122SGS403 and 122SGS404 are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the command reception waiting timer expires.

  Then, when the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404; Y), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405). When the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405; Y), that is, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (in the player information input process described later, the player After accepting the input of the information, the information (information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and the process proceeds to 122SGS417 (122SGS406).

  If no hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a cold notification command has been received (122SGS407). If the cold notification command has been received (122SGS407; Y), the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations and the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) , Information including the number of times of super reach, etc.) (122SGS408), and that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared, and that the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for notification (execution of RAM clear notification) is executed (122SGS409). In the RAM clear notification process, display of an image on the image display device 5, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. It is only necessary to be able to notify the clerk or the like of the amusement arcade that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the execution of the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 122SGS417.

  If no cold start notification command has been received (122SGS407; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410). When the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, a notification that the setting value changing operation is being performed (a notification that the setting value is being changed) is issued. ) Is executed (122SGS411). Note that the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state generally means that the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open and a clerk or the like of the game hall that changes the setting value uses the main board 11 Of the display monitor 122SG029 mounted on the camera. In other words, the setting change state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk or the like of the game hall that changes the setting value. It is considered from the display of the device 5 that it is impossible to determine whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state. Therefore, as the notification during the change of the setting value, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in a setting change state by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 to the clerk of the game hall changing the setting value. You only have to report that you are.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change end notification command and the set value designation command have been received, that is, whether or not the set value of the set value has ended (122SGS412). If the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command are received (122SGS412), the setting value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the received setting value designation command (the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). The value is specified, and the specified setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as setting value information (a value of “1” to “3” corresponding to the setting value) (122SG413). Then, after executing the processing of 122SGS408 and 122SGS409 described above, the process proceeds to 122SGS417. If at least one of the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command is not received (122SGS412; N), the processing of 122SGS411 and 122SGS412 is repeatedly executed.

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, a mode in which the RAM 122 is cleared after the execution of the notification of the change of the set value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The RAM 122 may be cleared in parallel. If the clearing of the RAM 122 is completed during the execution of the notification of the change of the set value, the RAM clear notification may be executed in parallel with the notification of the change of the set value, or the RAM may be cleared after the notification of the change of the set value is completed. Notification may be performed.

  If the set value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value check start notification command has been received, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting check state. It is determined whether or not it has been started (122SGS414). If the setting value confirmation start notification command has been received (122SGS414; Y), a setting value confirmation informing process for notifying that the setting is in the confirmation state (the setting value can be confirmed from the display monitor 122SG029). Execute (122SGS415). In the notification process during the setting value confirmation, the display of an image on the image display device 5, the emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. It suffices if the setting confirmation state can be reported around the pachinko gaming machine 1. If no effect of the setting value confirmation end notification command has been received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process of 122SGS405, and issues a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, It waits until any of the value confirmation start notification commands is received (repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGS405, 122SGS407, 122SGS410, and 122SGS414).

  As described above, in the effect control main processing in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-18, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start or the setting change state, the player information ( While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. after receiving the input of the player information from the RAM 122, the effect information (the number of fluctuations since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of big hits, The super-reach count, etc.) and set value information (any numerical value of “1” to “3” corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is not stored in the setting value information already stored in the RAM 122. The data is overwritten (updated).

  That is, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting confirmation state, or a setting change state.

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. Illustrates a form in which the player information and the production information are not cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, The player information and the effect information may be cleared.

  Returning to FIG. 21-17, in 122SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and displays the image. The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the received command is started in the device 5. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-19, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as an initial symbol. When the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "from the left as an initial symbol is displayed on the image display device 5. The display of the decorative symbol is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

  In the characteristic section 3 of the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of the decorative symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. When set, the decorative pattern is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial symbol at a higher rate than when the setting value (for example, "3") disadvantageous to the player is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that a setting value that is advantageous for the player is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

  In the characteristic section 3 of the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of the decorative symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example," 1 ") that is advantageous for the player is The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different between the case where the setting is set and the case where the setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, “3”) is set. In addition, when the setting value (for example, “1”) that is advantageous to the player is set, and when the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, “3”) is set, the speakers 8L and 8R output The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be varied.

  Then, returning to FIG. 21-17, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” to the look-ahead restriction counter in order to regulate the execution of the prefetch notice effect in the first four fluctuations (122SGS418). Thereafter, effect control CPU 120 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (122SGS419). When a timer interrupt occurs, effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (122SGS420) and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes a startup notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (122SGS421). In the startup notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interrupt is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If this is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined which of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command has been received. A start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and a start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start-up notification process timer is started, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started based on the value of the start-up notification process timer and the start-up notification process table by executing the start-up notification process in the next and subsequent interrupts. The notification may be performed.

  In the feature section 3 of the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification command. The mode of the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different depending on whether there is any.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, it receives a hot start notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 1 When the set value is not set, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed. The timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts emitting light for 60 seconds and the timing at which the output sound A starts for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts emitting light for 60 seconds. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  When the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. , The light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  That is, the specific control according to the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or a setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Output of the output sound A, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Performing the output of B includes both.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives the set value change end notification command when it is activated, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming effect Light emission of the lamp 9 for 40 seconds, output of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and display of a message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 (for example, a message image indicating that the change of the set value has been completed) Execute It should be noted that the emission start timing of the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The emission start timing of the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

  In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the setting value change end notification command is received. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received. Unlike the above, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

  In other words, the special control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the gaming effect lamp 9 to emit light for 40 seconds and output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds. C, and display of a message image on the image display device 5 for 40 seconds.

  As described above, the timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts to emit light, the timing at which sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R starts, and the timing at which image display is started on the image display device 5 are the same. Regarding the notification mode when the machine 1 is started, the notification period when the hot start notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start) is 60 seconds, and the cold start notification command is issued. When the notification is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start), the notification period is 60 seconds, and when the set value change end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up in a setting changed state). The period is 40 seconds.

  Note that, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, an example is described in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer such as a management computer of a game arcade or a counter of each unit, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start-up notification at this time, a signal that can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, the cold start, the setting change state, and the setting confirmation state, a device for executing the start notification is partially common. Although a certain form (in which light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether the device is started in a start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. (For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the image display device 5 To display a message image, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a signal is output to the management device from the above-described external output terminal.) Unishi may be.

  Further, the notification mode of each device that executes the start notification may be made different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. In this case, only some of the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may emit light.

  Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some of the speakers). Since there are many cases, sound output from all speakers 8L and 8R may be performed. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as “setting is being changed”, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 have been cleared, such as “RAM cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  Further, when a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals are provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the terminals for outputting signals to the management device may be made different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the change of the set value is completed (the time until the change of the set value is received or the set value change command is received) During the period, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change to the management device, and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification.

  When the external output terminal is used commonly for each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be made different according to each notification.

  As described above, in the start-up notification process, a form in which the start-up notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different according to the received command is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. In addition, the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which the start notification is performed even when any of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, and a set value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this. Among the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command, the pachinko gaming machine 1 A command that does not execute the startup notification may be provided.

  Further, in the feature section 3 of the present embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, a start notification in a different mode is executed in accordance with a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 Has been described as an example in which decorative patterns of different combinations are displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the command received when the device is activated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of the start notification and the combination of the decorative symbols may be all different according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or only a part of them may be the same.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a hot start, activated by a cold start, activated in a setting change state, or activated in a setting confirmation state. Also, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May not be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 21-17, next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a power-off detection process (122SGS422). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 22, first, effect control CPU 120 receives a power-off signal from a power supply board (not shown) indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped to a predetermined value or less. It is determined whether or not (122SGS431). If there is no input of the power-off signal (122SGS431; N), the processing is terminated, and if there is an input of the power-off signal (122SGS431; Y), the setting value information and the player information stored in the RAM 122 are deleted. The backup data to be included is specified (122SGS432), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (122SGS433). Then, after creating check data to be used for restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS434), the processing shifts to a loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Returning to FIG. 21-17, next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 122SGS423). In this command analysis processing, effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 21C) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs an effect control process (122SGS424). In the effect control process process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process (122SGS425) for updating the count value of a counter for generating an effect random number such as a big hit symbol determination random number, a player information input process for accepting input of player information (122SGS426), A player information output process of outputting player information (122SGS427) and an effect information totaling process of totaling effect information (122SGS428) are executed. Then, the process proceeds to S52.

  In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player to change the password (the password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and can receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of large hits, the number of super reach, and the like as player information stored each time the fluctuation display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

  In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and generates the two-dimensional code. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a portable terminal such as a smartphone, and transmits the player information totalized in the current game to an external server. 1 can be stored in the server.

  In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of large hits, the number of super reach, and the like stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time a variable display, a big hit game, or a super reach is executed. I do.

  Next, a description will be given of the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 21 to 22, in the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441). When the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441; Y), after executing the look-ahead notice setting process (S161), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is performed according to the effect control process flag. Perform the above processing.

  When the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is any one of “1” to “4” (122SGS441; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (122SGS442). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is “0” or any one of “2” to “7” (122SGS442; N), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. When the processing is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (122SGS442; Y), the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is decremented by 1 (122SGS443), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177) are performed according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7). By executing the processes of 122SGS441 to 122SGS443 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after startup, the execution of the prefetch notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

  In the characteristic section 3 of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variable display is performed four times. Although the form in which the execution of the prefetch notice effect is restricted is illustrated as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. 5), the execution of the prefetch notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 3 according to the present embodiment, regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start or in a setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related to the progress of the game based on the fact that the game becomes possible. As a setting, the form in which the execution of the prefetch notice effect is restricted over four variable displays is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of whether the game has been started in the changed state, based on the fact that the game has become possible, the settings relating to the progress of the game are set according to the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the RTC. The setting of the effect and the like may be set to the state at the time of factory shipment.

  As described above, in pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (H), effect control CPU 120 performs the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestion effect, and the second effect. The super-reach C and the super-reach D can be executed as a suggestion effect, and the super-reach C and the super-reach D can be executed when the super-reach C and the super-reach D are performed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach C or Super Reach D is notified from the start of the effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

This embodiment also includes a fourth invention described below. That is, as the conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is powered on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started. ), A command (control information) output from the main board to the effect control board (effect control means) in order to restore the gaming machine based on the memory in which the main board (game control board) is backed up. A command output from the main board to the effect control board to clear the backed-up memory regardless of the memory where the main board is backed up, and a state in which the set value of the gaming machine can be changed If the command output from the main board to the effect control board is the same, when the game machine is powered on and activated, the effect control board is Making it impossible perform appropriate processing according to the movement state. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 21-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
A backup storage unit (for example, the RAM 102) capable of holding stored contents for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Effect control means (eg, effect control CPU 120 clears RAM shown in FIG. 21-17) capable of controlling the effect based on control information (eg, the effect control command shown in FIG. 21-3) output from the game control means. A notification process, a notification process during a setting value change, a notification process during a setting value check, etc.),
With
After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the game control means sets a startup state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and restores the first startup based on the storage content stored in the backup storage means. State (for example, hot start), a second activation state (for example, cold start) for erasing and restoring the stored contents regardless of the stored contents stored in the backup storage means, and setting by the setting means is possible. , And outputs different control information corresponding to the activated state to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21-11 and 21-14). In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the CPU 103 transmits a hot start notification command to the effect control When the gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the CPU 103 transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 sends the cold start notification command to the effect control board 12. For sending the setting value change start notification command
According to this feature, it is possible for the effect control means to execute an appropriate process according to the activation state of the game control means when the power supply is started. .

Further, as means 2 of the fourth invention,
An effect control storage means (for example, a RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means;
The information to be erased among the information stored in the effect control storage means differs depending on whether the activation state corresponding to the control information is the second activation state or the third activation state ( For example, as shown in FIG. 21-18, the information cleared from the RAM 102 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting confirmation state, or a setting change state.
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform appropriate erasure according to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the fourth invention,
The game control means can output control information (for example, a set value change end notification command) for designating the end of the third activation state,
The effect control means performs special control according to the end of the third activation state based on the output of the control information designating the termination of the third activation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-20). As described above, based on the reception of the setting value change end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification process. Then, the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed).
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize by special control that the third activation state in which a set value can be set has ended.

Further, as means 4 of the fourth invention,
When the control information corresponding to the first activation state or the second activation state is output, the effect control means performs specific control in accordance with the output (for example, as shown in FIGS. Based on the reception of the start notification command and the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification process.
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize by a specific control that a starting state in which a set value cannot be set is provided.

Further, as means 5 of the fourth invention,
The effect control means performs different control depending on the activation state corresponding to the control information (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-20, based on the reception of the hot start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 In the start-up notification process, the CPU 120 for effect control performs based on the part that emits the light of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output of the output sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds and receives the cold start notification command. In the start-up notification process, a portion for executing the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputting the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the effect of controlling the production control based on the reception of the set value change end notification command. The CPU 120 emits light for 40 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification processing. And a message image for 40 seconds in the image display device 5. Also, as shown in Fig. 21-19, based on the reception of the hot start notification command and the cold start notification command, The decorative symbol is displayed as a combination of "1,""2," and "3" as the initial symbol, and the decorative symbol is set to "4" or "4" as the initial symbol based on the reception of the setting value change end notification command. (A part displayed with a combination of "5" and "6")
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which activation state is in effect.

Further, as means 6 of the fourth invention,
When the setting value is changed in the third activation state, the game control means deletes the backup information stored in the backup storage means except for the specific information (for example, FIG. As shown in 21-23, the RAM clearing process is executed based on the change of the set value, and the data after the address F001 except for the set value data stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is cleared).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate erasure of backup information according to a change in a set value.

Further, as means 7 of the fourth invention,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game,
The timing of erasing at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means differs between the first activation state and the second activation state (for example, as shown in a modification 11, a pachinko gaming machine) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start, the RAM clearing process is executed at a timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the staging control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, The part that executes the RAM clear processing at the timing after transmitting the setting value change start notification command to the control board 12)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute erasing of game information at an appropriate timing according to an activation state.

The present embodiment also includes a fifth invention described below. That is, as the conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is powered on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started. And when the main board is backed up regardless of the backed up storage (general start-up state) and when the set value of the gaming machine can be changed (set start-up state) If the notification mode is the same, it is difficult to identify whether the gaming machine is in the general activation state or the setting activation state, and it is difficult to find an illegal setting change or the like of the gaming machine. Was. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 21-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
A backup storage unit (for example, the RAM 102 or the RAM 122) capable of retaining the stored content for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Start-up notifying means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the start-up notifying process shown in FIG. 21-17) capable of notifying the start-up state of the game control means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started;
With
The game control means includes, as the start state, a general start state (for example, a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start) in which the storage contents stored in the backup storage means are cleared and started, and A setting activation state (for example, a setting change state) for validating the setting,
The start notification unit performs the notification in a different manner between the general start state and the set start state (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the light emission of the game effect lamp and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed. A part for displaying a message image on the display device 5)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily specify whether the activation state is the general activation state or the setting activation state, and thus it is possible to easily detect an illegality due to the setting. .

Further, as means 2 of the fifth invention,
The start notification unit is capable of executing various notifications according to the priority,
The priority of the notification of the setting activation state is higher than the priority of the notification of the general activation state (for example, as shown in Modification 12, the priority is higher during the execution of the high-priority setting value change notification. To prevent low RAM clear notification from being executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the notification of the setting activation state is given priority, so that it is possible to prevent the illegality due to the setting from being undetectable.

Further, as means 3 of the fifth invention,
The start notification unit notifies the set start state and the general start state in different notification periods (for example, the notification period when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start is 60 seconds, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Where the notification period is 40 seconds when is activated in the setting change state)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, an appropriate notification can be executed in a period according to the activation state.

Further, as means 4 of the fifth invention,
The activation notifying means,
A first notification unit (for example, the image display device 5), and a second notification unit (for example, the gaming effect lamp 9 and the speakers 8L and 8R) different from the first notification unit,
The setting notification state is notified by the first notification means (for example, a part displaying a message image on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 21-20),
The general start-up state is notified by the second notification means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 20, a portion that emits light from the game effect lamp 9 and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, the start-up notification is executed by different notification means, so that it is easy to recognize which start-up state is in effect.

Further, as means 5 of the fifth invention,
The game control means includes a game control state based on a common setting as a setting related to a game progress in a game possible state after the set start state and a game possible state after the general start state (for example, The game in which the CPU 103 does not execute the start winning determination process after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, and thereby, it is possible to execute the prefetch notice effect up to four times of variable display). According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience, such as recognizing that the setting has been changed, by executing game control with different settings.

The present embodiment also includes a sixth invention described below. That is, as a conventional gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-137351. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-137351, if the game information is unintentionally erased due to a change in the set value, a store or a player in which the gaming machine is installed may be lost. There is a risk of giving a disadvantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 21-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game,
A notifying unit capable of notifying in advance that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is to be deleted (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes a set value change confirmation notifying process in Modification 8);
With
The game control means erases at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means when a new set value is set by the setting means (for example, when the CPU 103 RAM clear processing),
The predetermined operation includes a setting change start operation (for example, an operation of turning on a clear switch), a setting change operation (for example, an operation of turning on a setting changeover switch 122SG052), and a setting change completion operation (for example, turning off a lock switch 122SG051). Operation) and
The setting unit can perform the setting change operation by performing the setting change start operation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23 as a modification 8, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON ( 122SGSa054a; part of which the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 can be executed after Y)), the setting change completion operation is performed after the enabled setting change operation, and the setting changed by the setting change operation is performed. The value is set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23 as Modification 8, the CPU 103 determines that the lock switch is OFF (122SGSa057; N), and then executes the process of 122SGSa058),
The notification unit executes the notification when the setting change start operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 24 as Modification 8, the effect control CPU 120 transmits the first setting value change start notification command). (The part that executes the setting value change confirmation notification processing based on the determination that the setting value has been received (122SGS410; Y))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the game information from being unintentionally erased due to a change in the set value.

Further, as means 2 of the sixth invention,
The game control means, after the setting change start operation, if the setting change completion operation is performed without performing the setting change operation, the game information stored in the game information storage means, Not erased (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23 as Modification 8, after the CPU 103 determines that the setting changeover switch has not been operated (122SGSa054d; N), it further determines that the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF. In this case, based on the fact that the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), the part that ends the set value change process without executing the RAM clear process (122SGSa060). )
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged by erasing the game information even though the set value is not changed. be able to.

Further, as means 3 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify that the game information is not erased by the game control means when the predetermined operation is completed without performing the setting change completion operation (for example, FIG. As shown at -25, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting value change confirmation notifying process to display the message image 122SG005M1 on the image display device 5.)
According to this feature, a game machine characterized by the fact that the operator can recognize an operation method for preventing the game information from being erased, Erasing can be further prevented.

Further, as means 4 of the sixth invention,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the erasure condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined confirmation operation is performed, the game control means stores the game information stored in the game information storage means. After erasing at least a part of the information (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-11), the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON in the game control main process (122SGSa003; Y), and then executes the RAM clear process (122SGSa017). Part),
The notification unit also performs the notification even when the erasure condition is satisfied (for example, a portion in which the message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5 as illustrated in FIGS. 21 to 26 as a ninth modification).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent game information from being erased unintentionally.

Further, as means 5 of the sixth invention,
Effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling effects based on control information output from the game control means;
Effect control storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means;
Selecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of selecting whether or not to execute erasure in the effect control storage means;
With
When the erasing condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and when it is selected by the selecting means not to execute the erasing in the effect control storage means, the game information storage is performed. At least a part of the game information stored in the means is erased (for example, as shown in a modified example 10, only the RAM 102 is cleared), and the erase condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. And when it is selected by the selection means to execute erasure in the effect control storage means, at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased. Erasing at least a part of the information stored in the effect control storage means (for example, as shown in Modification 10, RAM 102 and RAM 122 Part to clear both)
According to this feature, when the erasure condition is satisfied, whether or not to erase the effect control storage means together with the erasure in the game information storage means is described. Can be selected.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 3 in the embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to the embodiment, and there may be changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention. This is also included in the present invention.

  For example, in the characteristic part 3 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-11, when the clear switch is ON at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, after executing the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017), the lock switch is executed. When the 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa018; Y), the setting change process (122SGSa020) is executed, and a mode in which a new set value can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, it is first determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, the setting change process is performed. Even if the RAM clear processing is executed based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, There.

  When the RAM clearing process is executed based on the setting of the new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting changing process, the setting change is performed as shown in FIGS. In the processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a first setting value change times notification command indicating that the CPU 103 has started executing the setting change processing to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). Next, the setting value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a). If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa054a; N), the CPU 103 further determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054a; N). 122 SGSa054b). If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054b; Y), the processes of 122SGSa054a and 122SGSa054b are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the clear switch is turned ON or the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF. If the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the setting change process ends (122SGS061).

  When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a; Y), the CPU 103 issues a second setting value change start notification command indicating that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa054c), and it is determined whether or not the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d).

  If the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d; Y), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is a setting value that is one step less favorable for the player than “1”, is set as a temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “2”, the setting value “3” which is one step less favorable for the player than “2” is provisionally set. It is stored as a set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored as a temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the RAM 102 at the address F001 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). If the setting switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

  When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a). When the setting value (temporary setting value) is not stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102, that is, when the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052, a setting value change end notification command is produced. The setting is transmitted to the control board 12 and the setting change process ends (122SGS061).

  On the other hand, when the set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a; Y), the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the set value stored in the address F001 are used. (122SGSa057b), and it is determined whether the same setting value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c). If the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), that is, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been changed, a set value change end notification command is issued. The settings are transmitted to the substrate 12 and the setting change process is terminated (122SGS061).

  Further, when different setting values are stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; N), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, it is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. The set value is stored in the address F000, that is, the set value stored in the address F001 is stored as the main set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa058).

  Then, a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value (the newly set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1) stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa059), and the RAM is cleared. The processing is executed (122SGSa060). Note that the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060) executes the same processing as the RAM clear processing described with reference to FIG. 21-13, and excludes the set value stored in the RAM 102 at the address F000 (data stored after the address F001). Clear data). After execution of the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060), a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the setting change processing is ended (122SGS061).

  FIGS. 21 to 24 are flowcharts illustrating a part of the effect control main process according to the eighth modification. In the effect control main processing according to Modification 8, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the cold start notification command has not been received (122SGS407; N), as illustrated in FIGS. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (122SGS410a). If the first setting value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 21-17). If the first setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410a; Y), By executing a setting value change confirmation notification process (122SGS410b), the game information or the like stored in the RAM 102 is cleared by changing the setting value on the image display device 5, or the lock is set when the setting value is not changed. An instruction to turn off the switch 122SG051 is displayed as a message image 122SG005M1 (see FIG. 21-25A).

  Then, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410c). When the second set value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410C; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command has been received (122SGS410d). If the setting value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS410d; N), the processing of 122SGS410b to 122SGS410d is repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the first setting value change start notification command or the setting value change end notification command is received. If the setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS410d; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 21-17).

  Further, when the second setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value changing notification process for notifying that the setting value changing operation is being performed. (122SGS411), it is determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS411a). If the setting value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS411a; N), the processes of 122SG411 and 122SGS411a are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the setting value change end notification command is received. When the setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a; Y), it is determined whether or not the setting value designation command is received (122SGS411b). If the setting value designation command has not been received (122SGS411b; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 21-17). If the setting value designation command has been received (122SGS411b; Y), A set value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is specified, and the specified set value is set value information (“1” to “3” corresponding to the set value). Is updated and stored in the RAM 122 (122SG413). Then, the process proceeds to 122SGS408 (see FIG. 21-17).

  As described above, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine is operated in a state where the clerk of the game arcade turns on the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051. When the device 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 21-25 (A), the game display information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared by changing the set value in the image display device 5, or the set value is changed. If not, an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1.

  When the clerk of the game hall or the like turns off the lock switch 122SG051 while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5, the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. Is not changed and the RAM 102 is not cleared, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "1", "2", and "3". On the other hand, when the clerk of the game arcade turns on the clear switch again while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 21-25 (C), the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is in a setting change state, and the display of an image on the image display device 5, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like inform that the setting value is being changed.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without setting a new setting value by the clerk of the game hall or the like in the setting change state, or when the clerk of the game hall sets the new setting value to the same value as the original setting value. When the set value is set and the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed and the RAM 102 is cleared, as shown in FIG. Instead, a decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of “1”, “2”, and “3”. Further, in the setting change state, when a store clerk at the game hall or the like sets a new set value (changes the set value) and turns off the lock switch 122SG051, the set value is set as shown in FIG. Is changed, the RAM 102 is cleared, and a decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as an initial symbol.

  In the eighth modification, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with the clearing switch and the lock switch 122SG051 being turned on by the clerk of the game arcade, and changes the set value to the image display device 5 to change the RAM 102. Of the game information and the like, and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the setting value is not changed are displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 21 to 26 as a ninth modification, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the clear switch is turned on, so that the pachinko machine is displayed on the image display device 5. Starting the gaming machine 1 with a cold start clears the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102, The instruction If it does not start the machine 1 at cold start to reboot of the pachinko gaming machine 1, may be displayed as a message image 122SG005M2.

  In this way, for example, when a clerk at a game hall or the like accidentally turns on the clear switch to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 by hot start, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up at a cold start. It is possible to prevent the game information stored in the RAM 102 from being cleared unintentionally.

  In the modified examples 8 and 9, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state or started in a cold start, the message image 122SG005M1 and the message image 122SG005M2 are displayed on the image display device 5. Although the form in which the confirmation of whether or not to clear the RAM 102 is illustrated by way of example, the present invention is not limited to this. The confirmation may be performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start, or when both are started.

  In the eighth modification, the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade while the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 are turned on, thereby changing the set value to the image display device 5 and changing the RAM 102 Of the game information and the like, and an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the setting value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. Without limitation, as shown in FIGS. 21-27 as a tenth modification, when the RAM 102 is cleared based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or the set value is changed, The image display device 5 indicates that the set values have been changed, that the RAM 102 has been cleared, and that these set values have been changed. And a message image 122SG005M3 including an option of whether or not to clear the RAM 122 in response to the clear of the RAM 102, and accepts a selection of whether or not to clear the RAM 122 by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. You may do so.

  When clearing of the RAM 122 is selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 executes the RAM clearing process to clear other information except the set value information in the RAM 122 (results). If the user does not select to clear the RAM 122 by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the RAM 122 is not cleared (resulting in clearing only the RAM 102).

  Also, in the characteristic part 3 in the above embodiment, the same timing (cold start notification command or setting for the effect control board 12) is applied to the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and the case of starting the pachinko gaming machine in a setting change state. Although the form in which the RAM clearing process is executed at the timing before the value change start notification command is transmitted) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 11, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 When starting at the start, the RAM clearing process is executed at a timing before transmitting the cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, the effect control board 12 is started. After the transmission of the set value change start notification command to the On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, such as executing a RAM clearing process after transmitting the set value change end notification command (that is, after the end of the set value change), and by starting with the setting changed state. The timing for clearing the RAM 102 may be different between the case and the case of the operation.

  In the characteristic part 3 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-17, the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are always cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a setting change state. Although the form in which the RAM clear notification process is executed to notify the fact (perform the RAM clear notification) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 12, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is activated in the setting change state to notify that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed (execution of a change in the setting value is performed), and priority is given to each notification such as not executing the RAM clear notification. If a high priority notification (for example, a notification of a change in the set value) is being performed, a low priority notification (for example, a RAM clear notification) is not performed. It may be.

  In the case where priority is provided to each notification in this way, a low-priority notification may be executed after a high-priority notification is executed. In this case, the low-priority notification is executed in a shorter period than when the high-priority notification is not executed, so that the notification execution period is prevented from becoming long. You may.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 3 in the embodiment, the setting for the movable body 32 is not executed at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. At the time, the confirmation operation of whether or not the movable body 32 operates normally may be executed in parallel with the above-described notification of the RAM clear, the notification of the change of the set value, the notification of the confirmation of the set value, and the various types of start notification. . When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a hot start or a cold start, a start-up notification for 60 seconds is executed, so that the operation of checking the movable body 32 can be executed during the start-up notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the set value is changed in addition to the start notification for 40 seconds. Therefore, the movable body 32 is changed during the change of these set values and during the start notification for 40 seconds. Can be performed.

  The operation of checking the movable body 32 may be performed from the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, regardless of the activation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, The effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) may execute the set value change start notification command, the set value change end notification command, the set value confirmation start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the like, from the time when they are received. Furthermore, in the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the checking operation of the movable body 32 from the point of receiving the setting value change start notification command, that is, executes the checking operation of the movable body 32 while the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed. In such a case, even if an error occurs in the confirmation operation, the execution of the notification during the change of the setting value may be prioritized, and the error notification of the confirmation operation may not be executed.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 3 of the embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that the new setting value is directly reflected in the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once restarted (pachinko gaming). The new setting value may be reflected in the game by activating the machine 1 by a hot start). When the new setting value is reflected in the game by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1 as described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the movable body 32 is checked. After the movable body 32 is slightly moved from the origin position to the production position, a confirmation operation that can be performed in a relatively short period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again, is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is restarted, as a confirmation operation of the movable body 32, a confirmation that requires a relatively long period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position and then moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again. The operation may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the period required for the operation of checking the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the embodiment, the set value stored in the address F000 is disclosed as the specific information that is not cleared from the RAM 102. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific value is not cleared from the RAM 102. The specific information that is not performed may include the setting of the RTC, an error history, and the like.

  Furthermore, in the characteristic part 3 of the above embodiment, the mode in which the set value as the specific information that is not cleared in the RAM 102, the temporary set value as the information to be cleared, the game information, and the like are stored is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, one RAM stores specific information such as set values which are not cleared, and the other RAM stores provisional set values and game information. Information to be cleared, such as information, may be stored. By doing so, the RAM (temporary set values, game information, etc.) on the other side is stored depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. (RAM) is cleared. Further, an area for storing specific information that is not cleared and an area for storing information that is cleared may be provided in the RAM 102.

  When two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100 as described above, a RAM (Static Random Access Memory) connected to a backup battery is connected to a RAM for storing uncleared specific information such as set values. On the other hand, by setting the RAM in which the temporary setting values and the game information are stored as FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory), data having higher importance than other data such as setting values can be surely cleared. Alternatively, the information may be stored without being stored.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the clear switch is mounted on the power supply board is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be mounted on. By doing so, it is not necessary to newly attach a clear switch to the existing power supply board, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the characteristic portion 3, the mode in which the display monitor 122SG051 for displaying the set value is mounted on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A display monitor 122SG051 may be provided at a position near the setting changeover switch 122SG052 in 11 to make it easy to execute a setting value changing operation.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the display monitor 122SG051 for displaying the set value on the main board 11 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game is not limited to this. When it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the machine 1, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 122SG051.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the above-described embodiment, an example is described in which the display monitor 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 are provided on the main board 11 so that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed using a monitor (7-segment monitor) mounted on the payout control board, a reset button, or the like.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 21-11, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the same as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. Since the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) is executed, both the set value change start notification command and the cold start notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 3 in the embodiment, the setting value 1 is set to the most advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting value 3 is set to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (the setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous for the game place). The setting value 3 is set to be the most advantageous setting value for the game hall), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous for the player. The set value may be set as the set value 3, and the set value 3 may be set to be the most advantageous set value for the player.

  In particular, in the characteristic part 3, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), “00H” is set to the address F000, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is a state in which the set value 1 is automatically set, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes the most advantageous state for the player. For this reason, some players may cause the pachinko gaming machine 1 to improperly set the set value 1 by causing the CPU 103 to execute the RAM clearing process (see FIG. 21A) after causing an abnormality in the RAM 102 or the like. It is assumed to be set. Therefore, as described above, by setting the set value 1 to the most unfavorable set value for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the game based on the fact that the CPU 103 has executed the RAM clearing process when the RAM 102 has an abnormality or the like. It is possible to prevent the player from being in an advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the characteristic part 3 of the embodiment, the special control and the specific control performed by the effect control CPU 120 perform the lighting period of the game effect lamp 9, the sound and the output period output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image. Although the form in which the image is displayed on the display device 5 is different (the control related to the notification at the time of starting is different) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the control related to the above-described notification at the time of starting, an initial symbol (see FIG. 21-19), a background image, and a character displayed on the image display device 5 after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready for a game. (For example, the effect state and the effect state after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state in which the game can be played) and the operation of confirming the movable body 32. Whether rows, aspects and execution period of the confirmation operations may include control surrounding confirmation operation, such as different. That is, the special control and the specific control in the present invention may be any control as long as at least a part of the control target of the effect control CPU 120, the control mode of the effect control CPU 120, the control period of the effect control CPU 120, and the like are different. .

  In the characteristic part 3 of the embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. For example, by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game by using a gaming value, Can be started, and a variable display result is derived on an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each of which is identifiable, thereby ending one game and displaying the variable display derived on the image display device. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to the result.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a title corresponding to the reach reach of the super reach is displayed from the start of the reach reach of the super reach (the characteristic portion 31AK in FIGS. 1 to 19), the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052. Is operated, any one of a plurality of set values can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By opening and closing the gaming machine frame 109SG003 and the glass door frame 109SG003a, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are set. A mode in which the state can be switched between an operable state and an inoperable state (a characteristic part in FIGS. 20-1 to 20-39), and any one of a plurality of set values for the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the main board 11 (CPU 103). Can be set, and the setting is converted from the set value. Is stored in the RAM 102 and the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) can execute a suggestion effect (Asaichi background effect) indicating the set value (FIG. 20-40 to FIG. 20-). Forty-six feature 2), different commands are transmitted from the main board 11 (CPU 103) to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) according to the activated state of the pachinko game machine 1, and the pachinko game machine 1 It is possible to execute a start notification in a different manner between a case where the pachinko game machine is started in a cold start and a case where the pachinko game machine is started in a setting change state, and a form for notifying that the RAM 102 is cleared when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. (Feature 3 of FIGS. 21-1 to 21-27) has been disclosed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be applied with a plurality of features among these features. There.

  For example, in the case of applying the characteristic portion 31AK of FIGS. 1 to 19 and the characteristic portion 2 of FIGS. 20-40 to 20-46 to the pachinko gaming machine 1, as a suggestive effect indicating the set value, The mode of the title corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach may be made different depending on the set value. In the case where the characteristic part 2 of FIGS. 20-40 to 20-46 and the characteristic part 3 of FIGS. 21-1 to 21-27 are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting value is replaced with the address F000 of the RAM 102. May be stored.

(Description of feature part 4 of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part 4 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 22A is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. A first movable body 116SG032L is arranged on the left side of the image display device 5 in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a second movable body 116SG032R is arranged on the right side of the image display device 5. Further, a third movable body 116SG032U is arranged above the image display device 5, and a fourth movable body 116SG032D is arranged below the image display device 5.

  Further, in FIG. 22B, the effect control board 12 includes a first movable body unit 116SG131 for operating the first movable body 116SG032L, a second movable body unit 116SG132 for operating the second movable body 116SG032R, and a third movable body 116SG132. A third movable body unit 116SG133 for operating the movable body 116SG032U and a fourth movable body unit 116SG134 for operating the fourth movable body 116SG032D are connected to each other.

  The first movable unit 116SG131 has a drive motor 116SG131a for operating the first movable body 116SG032L and the first movable body 116SG032L having the origin position (the left position of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 22-4 (A)). That the first movable body 116SG032L and the origin position sensor 116SG131b for detecting that the first movable body 116SG032L is disposed at the rendering position (the front position of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 22-4 (A)). And an effect position sensor 116SG131c for detection.

  The second movable body unit 116SG132 has a drive motor 116SG132a for operating the second movable body 116SG032R, and the second movable body 116SG032R is located at the origin position (the right side position of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 22-4 (A)). That the second movable body 116SG032R and the origin position sensor 116SG132b for detecting that the second movable body 116SG032R is arranged at the production position (the front position of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 22-4 (A)). And an effect position sensor 116SG132c for detection.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 22-4 (A), the first movable body 116SG032L and the second movable body 116SG032R move from each origin position to each effecting position, so as to be in front of the image display device 5. The tips intersect.

  The third movable body unit 116SG133 has a drive motor 116SG133a for operating the third movable body 116SG032U and the third movable body 116SG032U at the origin position (the upper position of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 22-4 (B)). The origin position sensor 116SG133b for detecting the arrangement and the third movable body 116SG032U are arranged at the rendering position (upper front position of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 22-4 (B)). And an effect position sensor 116SG133c for detection.

  The fourth movable body unit 116SG134 has a drive motor 116SG134a for operating the fourth movable body 116SG032D and the fourth movable body 116SG032D at the origin position (the lower position of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 22-4 (B)). It is assumed that the origin position sensor 116SG134b for detecting the arrangement and the fourth movable body 116SG032D are arranged at the production position (the lower front position of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 22-4 (B)). And an effect position sensor 116SG134c for detection.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 22-4 (B), the third movable body 116SG032U and the fourth movable body 116SG032D move the image display device 5 from each player by moving from each origin position to each effect position. It functions as a shutter to hide.

  Note that the effect control CPU 120 in the characteristic part 4 of the present embodiment performs the first movable body 116SG032L, the second movable body 116SG032R, the third movable body 116SG032U, and the As a movable body operation effect for operating the movable body 116SG032D, the first movable body 116SG032L, the second movable body 116SG032R, the third movable body 116SG032U, and the fourth movable body 116SG032D can be individually operated.

  Note that the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body motion effect in the variable display effect process or the large hit effect process to indicate that the variable display result is a big hit, to inform the number of rounds during the big hit game, It is only necessary to be able to notify that the state is controlled to the probable change state after the end.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 22B, the effect control board 12 is connected to the VDP116SG500. The effect control CPU 120 is capable of causing the VDP 116 SG 500 to execute image display control on the image display device 5 by transmitting a predetermined command to the VDP 116 SG 500.

  FIG. 22C is an explanatory diagram of an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic part 4 of the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 22C is an example, and another command form may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22C, the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, a determination result (predetermined result) as to whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit” or “small hit”, or the variable display result is “big hit” Different EXT data is set in accordance with the result of determining whether the type of jackpot is one of a plurality of types (a jackpot type determination result).

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time reduction control is not performed (low-probability low base state, normal state), and the command 9501H is a game state (low) in which time reduction control is performed. The command 9502H is a second game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high confidence base state, probability change state) in which the time saving control and the probability change control are performed. Command.

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the generated error (abnormal). In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the effect control board 12 side. be able to.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening, which notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening and the notification command after opening of the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number to display the special figure reserved storage number in a identifiable manner. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  The command F1XXH is a model ID notification command for notifying a model ID stored in the ROM 101 or the like as identification information capable of specifying the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22B, the effect control board 12 is connected to a setting changeover switch 116SG400 for switching various settings in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 22-5, the setting changeover switch 116SG400 is provided on the effect control board 12, and can be operated when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. The setting change switch 116SG400 has a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”, as shown in FIG. 22-6, and switches these channels by rotating the knob 1116SG401. Switch. In the characteristic portion 4 of the present embodiment, for example, the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed by switching the channel to any one of “0” to “9”. Further, for example, by switching the channel to any one of “A” to “F”, or by further performing a specific operation after switching the channel, the power consumption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced (to the power saving mode). Transition), operation check of each movable body (first movable body 116SG032L, second movable body 116SG032R, third movable body 116SG032U, fourth movable body 116SG032D), push button 31B, stick controller 31A, and the like can be executed. .

  Next, an operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 4 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 22-7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the game control main process in the characteristic part 4 of the present embodiment. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first executes the processes of S1 to S9 as in the game control main process shown in FIG. Then, when a command at the time of restoration is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the processing of S7, or when an initialization designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the processing of S9, a model ID notification command is further transmitted to the effect control board 12. (116SGSa009a). Then, the processes of S10 to S12 are executed as in the game control main process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 22-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect control main process. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the processes of S71 and S72 similarly to the effect control main process shown in FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not a model ID notification command has been received (116SGSa072a). If the model ID notification command has not been received (116SGSa072a; N), the process of the 116SGSa072a is repeatedly executed, and waits until the model ID notification command is received. If a model ID notification command has been received (116SGSa072a; Y), the RAM 122 stores the model ID specified from the received model ID notification command. Then, after executing the effects control main process shown in FIG. 6 in the same manner from S73 to S77, a setting change switch related process (116SGS78) is executed, and the process proceeds to S73.

  FIG. 22-9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed by 116SGS078 in FIG. 22-8 as a setting changeover switch-related process. In the setting change switch-related processing, effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not an origin return operation execution flag described later is set (116SGS200). If the origin return operation in progress flag is not set (116SGS200; N), it is further determined whether or not a confirmation operation in progress flag described later is set (116SGS201). If the confirmation operation in-progress flag is not set (116SGS201; N), it is further determined whether or not a confirmation operation standby flag described later is set (116SGS202).

  If the confirmation operation standby flag is not set (116SGS202; N), it is further determined whether or not the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 is set to “0” (116SGS203). When the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is set to “0” (116SGS203; Y), the setting of the change of the volume and the light amount, the setting to shift to the power saving mode, the setting of each movable body, the push button 31B, the stick controller 31A, etc. It is determined that the status has not been confirmed, and the processing related to the setting changeover switch ends.

  When the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is not set to “0” (116SGS203; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is set to “C”. (116SGS204). When the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is not set to “C” (116SGS204; N), that is, the channels of the setting switch 116SG400 are “1” to “9”, “A”, “B”, “D”. If it is set to any one of? To "F", processing corresponding to the set channel is executed (116SGS205), and the processing related to the setting changeover switch ends.

  When the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is set to “C” (116SGS204; Y), the effect control CPU 120 sets each movable body (the first movable body 116SG032L, the second movable body 116SG032R, the third movable body). (The body 116SG032U, the fourth movable body 116SG032D), the push button 31B, the stick controller 31A, and the like. 116SGS206), and further sets the push button operation number counter to 0 (116SGS207), and terminates the setting switch related processing.

  If the confirmation operation standby flag is set in the 116SGS202 (116SGS202; Y), it is determined whether or not the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is set to “C” (116SGS208). When the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is not set to “C” (116SGS208; N), that is, when the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is set to “C” once but is reset to another channel Clears the confirmation operation standby flag (116SGS209) and ends the setting switch related processing.

  When the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is set to “C” (116SGS208; Y), it is determined whether or not the push button is operated (116SGS210). If there is no push button operation (116SGS210; N), the setting switch related processing is terminated, and if there is a push button operation (116SGS210; Y), the value of the push button operation counter is incremented by one (116SGS211). Further, whether or not the push button operation number counter has reached “5”, that is, after the channel of the setting change switch 116SGS400 is set to “C”, the push button 31B is operated five times without switching the channel. It is determined whether or not it has been performed. (116SGS212). If the push button operation count counter is not 5 (116SGS212; N), the setting change switch related processing ends.

  When the push button operation number counter is 5 (116SGS212; Y), after the channel of the setting switch 116SGS400 is set to “C”, the push button 31B is operated five times without switching the channel. Based on this, the confirmation operation standby flag is cleared (116SGS213), and each movable body (first movable body 116SG032L, second movable body 116SG032R, third movable body 116SG032U, fourth movable body 116SG032D) and push button are pressed. A confirmation operation in-progress flag indicating that the confirmation operation for confirming the state of the stick controller 31A, etc. is being executed is set (116SGS214), and the processing related to the setting changeover switch ends.

  If the confirmation operation in progress flag is set in the 116SGS 201 (116SGS 201; Y), the movable body operation recheck flag indicating that the later-described movable body operation recheck process is being executed is set. It is determined whether or not there is (116SGS215). If the moving body operation rechecking flag is set (116SGS215; Y), the process proceeds to 116SGS225. If the moving body operation rechecking flag is not set (116SGS215; N), a moving body operation check process described later is performed. It is determined whether or not the moving body operation check in progress flag indicating that is being executed is set (116SGS216).

  If the moving body operation check flag is set (116SGS216; Y), the process proceeds to 1167SGS22. If the movable body operation check flag is not set (116SGS216; N), the model ID stored in the RAM 122 or the like. To specify the character color of the operation check result image (116SGS217), and to output the operation check result image display start command for starting the operation check result image display according to the specified character color to the VDP116SG500. The user makes settings (116SGS218) and proceeds to 116SGS219.

  That is, when the operation check result image display start designation command corresponding to the model ID is input from the effect control CPU 120, the VDP116SG 500 displays the operation check result image in the character color specified from the operation check result image display start designation command. The information is displayed on the display device 5. In particular, in the characteristic part 4 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22-15, the character color of the operation check result screen is different for each model ID. For example, it is possible to specify the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the character color of the operation check result screen, and to change the model when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is manufactured or to install the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a game hall. Installation errors and the like can be prevented.

  Next, in 116SGS219, effect control CPU 120 specifies the state of controller sensor unit 35A (116SGS219) and specifies the state of push sensor 35B (116SGS220). Further, the operation check result image is updated according to the states of the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B specified in the processing of the 116SGS219 and the 116SGS220 (116SGS221).

  Specifically, when the state of controller sensor unit 35A is normal (for example, when controller sensor unit 35A is normally energized), effect control CPU 120 performs the operation displayed on image display device 5. “O” is displayed in the column of the controller sensor unit 35A in the check result image, and when the state of the controller sensor unit 35A is abnormal (for example, when the controller sensor unit 35A is not normally energized), the image display device is displayed. “X” is displayed in the column of the controller sensor unit 35A of the operation check result image displayed in 5.

  When the state of the push sensor 35B is normal (for example, when the push sensor 35B is normally energized), “Push sensor 35B” is displayed in the column of the push sensor 35B of the operation check result image displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed, and when the state of the push sensor 35B is abnormal (for example, when the push sensor 35B is not normally energized), the push sensor 35B of the operation check result image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed. "X" is displayed in the column. After execution of 116SGS221, effect control CPU 120 sets a moving body operation check flag (116SGS221a), and proceeds to 116SGS222.

  In 116SGS222, production control CPU 120 executes a movable body operation check process for performing an operation check of each movable body (first movable body 116SG032L, second movable body 116SG032R, third movable body 116SG032U, fourth movable body 116SG032D). (116 SGS222). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation check of all the movable bodies has been completed in the movable body operation check processing (116SGS223). If the operation check of all the movable bodies has not been completed (116SGS223; N), the processing related to the setting changeover switch is completed, and if the operation check of all the movable bodies has been completed (116SGS223; Y), the movable state is determined. The body operation check flag is cleared (116SGS223a), and whether or not an operation check failure flag corresponding to any of the movable bodies is set, that is, the movable body whose operation check did not end normally in the movable body operation check processing It is determined whether or not there is (116SGS224).

  When the operation check failure flag corresponding to any of the movable bodies is not set (116SGS224; N), the processing related to the setting changeover switch ends, and the operation check failure flag corresponding to any of the movable bodies is set. In the case (116SGS224; Y), the movable body operation rechecking flag is set (116SGS224a), and the process proceeds to 116SGS225.

  Then, in 116 SGS 225, effect control CPU 120 performs movable body operation recheck processing for performing an operation check again on the movable body whose operation check has not been completed normally in the movable body operation check processing (116 SGS 225), and a setting changeover switch. The related processing ends.

  In addition, when the origin return operation in progress flag is set in 116SGS200 (116SGS200; Y), a movable body origin return operation process (116SGS230) for moving each movable body toward each origin position is performed, and the setting is performed. The process related to the changeover switch ends.

  FIGS. 22-10 and 22-11 are flowcharts illustrating an example of processing executed by the 116SGS 222 of FIG. 22-9 as the movable body operation check processing. In the movable body operation checking process, first, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the channel of setting changeover switch 116SG400 is set to “C” (116SGS231). If the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is set to “C” (116SGS231; Y), it is determined whether or not the return path process timer of any movable body is operating (116SGS232).

  If the return process timer of any movable body is not in operation (116SGS232; N), it is further determined whether or not the forward process timer of any movable body is in operation (116SGS233). If the process timer for the forward path of any movable body is not in operation (116SGS233; N), it is further determined whether or not the process timer for returning to the origin of any movable body is in operation (116SGS234). If any of the movable bodies is not in operation of the origin return process timer (116SGS234; N), it is determined whether or not there is a movable body to be subjected to an operation check based on the setting data stored in the RAM 122 or the like. It is determined whether or not there is a movable body that has not been checked (116SGS235).

  When there is no movable body to be checked for operation (116SGS235; N), the movable body operation check processing is terminated. When there is a movable body to be checked for operation (116SGS235; Y), the setting data stored in the RAM 122 or the like is used. A movable body to be subjected to an operation check is specified based on the result (116SGS236). In the process of 116SGS236, if the operation check of any movable body has not been executed yet, the first movable body 116SG032L is specified as an operation check target, and after the operation check of the first movable body 116SG032L is executed, After specifying the second movable body 116SG032R as an operation check target and performing the operation check of the second movable body 116SG032R, specifying the third movable body 116SG032U as the operation check target and performing the operation check of the third movable body 116SG032U Specifies the fourth movable body 116SG032D as the operation check target. That is, in the characteristic portion 4 of the present embodiment, the operation check is performed in the order of the first movable body 116SG032L, the second movable body 116SG032R, the third movable body 116032U, and the fourth movable body 116SG032D.

  In the characteristic portion 4 of the present embodiment, an example in which the operation check is performed in the order of the first movable body 116SG032L, the second movable body 116SG032R, the third movable body 116032U, and the fourth movable body 116SG032D is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation check of a plurality of movable bodies may be performed simultaneously among these four movable bodies, and the operation check of each movable body may be different. They may be executed in order.

  Next, in 116SGS237, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body (movable body to be checked) specified in 116SGS236 is ON, that is, the movable body to be checked is the movable body of the movable body. It is determined whether or not it is arranged at the origin position (116SGS237). If the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be checked is OFF (116SGS237; N), an origin return process table corresponding to the movable body to be checked (process table for moving the movable body to the origin position) Is read out and set (116SGS238), the origin return process timer in the process data 1 of the set origin return process table is started, and the process proceeds to 116SGS242 (116SGS239).

  If the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body (movable body to be checked) specified in 116SGS236 is ON (116SGS237; Y), the outward path process table (movable body is set to the origin) corresponding to the movable body to be checked. After reading and setting the process table for moving from the position to the presentation position (116SGS240), the forward process timer in the process data 1 of the set forward process table is started and the process proceeds to 116SGS242 (116SGS241). . In the characteristic part 4 of the present embodiment, the outward process table corresponding to each movable body is stored in the RAM 122 in advance.

  Then, in 116SGS242, effect control CPU 120 determines the drive motor (the check target movable body) corresponding to the check target movable body in accordance with the contents of the first process data of the set process table (origin return process table or forward process table). If the first movable body 116SG032L is the drive motor 116SG131a, if the movable body to be checked is the second movable body 116SG032R, the drive motor 116SG132a, if the movable body to be checked is the third movable body 116SG032U, the drive motor 116SG133a is checked. If the target movable body is the fourth movable body 116SG032DL, the driving of the drive motor 116SG134a) is performed, and the movable body operation check processing ends (116SGS242).

Note that, as shown in FIG. 22-16, when performing the processing of 116SGS238, 116SGS239, and 116SGS242, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body toward the origin position by executing the processing of 116SGS244 to 116SGS250 described later. executing a non-detection operation control to, if the processing at the 116SGS240～116SGS242, reciprocates in the movable member as the origin position and the presentation position by performing the below-described processing of 116SGS255~116SGS261 and 116SGS271~116SGS280 Execute actual operation check operation control.

  As shown in FIGS. 22-17 (A) and 22-17 (B), when performing the operation control for confirming the actual operation, the effect control CPU 120 accelerates the movable body from the origin position and then decelerates the effect. At the same time, control is performed to stop at the origin position while accelerating from the production position and then decelerating. That is, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation for confirming that the movable body can normally operate, the control speed of the movable body is changed in the order of low speed → high speed → low speed between the origin position and the production position. .

  On the other hand, when performing the non-detection operation control, the effect control CPU 120 controls the movable body to always operate at the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control during the period of moving the movable body to the origin position. I do. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 performs the actual operation check operation control and the non-detection operation control, so that the movable body always has the lowest speed in the actual operation check operation control when the non-detection operation control is executed. , The movable body can be stopped at any timing, so that the movable body can be located at the origin position without fear of being damaged by collision or the like.

  Returning to FIG. 22-10, when the origin return process timer is being operated in 116SGS234 (116SGS234; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be checked is ON. Is determined (116SGS243). When the origin position sensor corresponding to the check target movable body is ON (116SGS243; Y), the processing of 116SGS240 to 116SGS242 is executed, and when the origin position sensor corresponding to the check target movable body is OFF (116SGS243). N) decrements the value of the process timer for origin return by -1 (116SGS244). Then, it is determined whether or not the origin return process timer has expired (116SGS245).

  When the origin return process timer has not expired (166SGS245; N), the drive motor corresponding to the movable body to be checked for operation is driven in accordance with the contents of the process data corresponding to the origin return process timer to move the movable body. The operation check processing ends (116SGS246). If the origin return process timer has timed out (116SGS245; Y), it is determined whether the timer-out origin return process timer is the last origin return process timer (116SGS247).

  If the origin-returning process timer that has expired is not the last origin-returning process timer (116SGS247; N), the process data is switched (116SGS248). That is, by setting the next set process timer value in the origin return process table to the origin return process timer, the origin return process timer is restarted (116SGS249). Further, the drive motor corresponding to the movable body to be checked for operation is driven according to the origin return process data set next, and the movable body operation check processing ends (116SGS250).

  Further, when the last origin return process timer in 116SGS247 expires (116SGS247; Y), it is determined whether or not the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be checked for operation is ON (116SGS251). If the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body of the operation check target is ON (116SGS251; Y), the operation check result image is updated and displayed (check in the operation check image) in accordance with the origin position sensor being ON. “O” is displayed in the column of the origin position sensor of the target movable body (116SGS252), and the processing of 116SGS240 to 116SGS242 is executed.

  When the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be checked for operation is OFF (116SGS251; N), the operation check result image is updated and displayed according to the fact that the origin position sensor is OFF (operation check image). In the column of the origin position sensor of the movable body to be checked, "" indicating that the operation check of the movable body did not end normally is displayed (116SGS253), and the operation check failed according to the movable body to be checked. The flag is set, and the movable body operation check processing ends (116SGS254).

  If the forward process timer is being operated in 116SGS233 (116SGS233; Y), the value of the forward process timer is decremented by 1 (116SGS255), and it is determined whether the forward process timer has expired. (116SGS256).

  If the outward process timer has not expired (166SGS256; N), the drive motor corresponding to the movable object to be operation-checked is driven according to the content of the process data corresponding to the outward process timer to check the operation of the movable object. The process ends (116SGS257). When the outward process timer has expired (116SGS256; Y), it is determined whether or not the outward process timer that has expired is the last outward process timer (116SGS258).

  If the outgoing process timer that has expired is not the last outgoing process timer (116SGS258; N), the process data is switched (116SGS259). That is, by setting the next process timer set value in the forward process table to the forward process timer, the forward process timer is restarted (116SGS260). In addition, the driving of the drive motor corresponding to the movable body to be checked for operation is performed according to the outward process data set next, and the movable body operation check processing ends (116SGS261).

  If the last outbound process timer has expired in 116SGS258 (116SGS258; Y), it is determined whether or not the effect position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be checked for operation is ON (116SGS262). When the effect position sensor corresponding to the movable body of the operation check target is ON (116SGS262; Y), the operation check result image is updated and displayed according to the effect position sensor being ON (check in the operation check image). “○” is displayed in the field of the effect position sensor of the target movable body) (116SGS263), and the process of 116SGS271 is executed.

  If the effect position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be checked for operation is OFF (116SGS262; N), the operation check result image is updated and displayed (operation check image) in accordance with the effect position sensor being OFF. Is displayed in the field of the effect position sensor of the movable body to be checked (116SGS264), an operation check failure flag corresponding to the movable body to be checked is set, and the movable body operation check processing ends (116SGS265). ).

  Further, in 116SGS271, effect control CPU 120 reads and sets a return path process table (a process table for moving the movable body from the production position toward the origin position) corresponding to the movable body to be checked (116SGS271). Then, the return process timer in the process data 1 of the set return process table is started (116SGS272). In the characteristic portion 4 of the present embodiment, a return path process table corresponding to each movable body is stored in the RAM 122 in advance.

  Then, in 116SGS273, effect control CPU 120 drives the drive motor corresponding to the movable body to be checked in accordance with the content of the first process data in the set return process table, and ends the movable body operation check processing (116SGS273). ).

  Further, when the return path process timer is being operated in 116SGS232 (116SGS232; Y), the value of the return path process timer is decremented by 1 (116SGS274), and it is determined whether or not the return path process timer has expired. (116SGS275).

  If the return process timer has not expired (166SGS275; N), the drive motor corresponding to the target of the operation check is driven in accordance with the contents of the process data corresponding to the return process timer to check the operation of the movable member. The process ends (116SGS276). If the return process timer has expired (116SGS276; Y), it is determined whether or not the return process timer that has expired is the last return process timer (116SGS277).

  If the return-path process timer that has expired is not the last return-path process timer (116SGS277; N), the process data is switched (116SGS278). In other words, the process timer set value set next in the return path process table is set in the return path process timer to restart the return path process timer (116SGS279). In addition, the drive motor corresponding to the movable body to be checked for operation is driven in accordance with the return process data set next, and the movable body operation check processing ends (116SGS280).

  If the last return process timer has expired in 116SGS277 (116SGS277; Y), it is determined whether the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be checked for operation is ON (116SGS281). When the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body of the operation check target is ON (116SGS281; Y), the operation check result image is updated and displayed according to the ON of the origin position sensor (check in the operation check image). "O" is displayed in the column of the origin position sensor of the target movable body) (116SGS282), and the movable body operation check processing ends.

  When the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be checked for operation is OFF (116SGS281; N), the operation check result image is updated and displayed according to the fact that the origin position sensor is OFF (operation check image). Is displayed in the column of the origin position sensor of the movable body to be checked (116SGS283), an operation check failure flag corresponding to the movable body to be checked is set, and the movable body operation check processing ends (116SGS284). ).

  If the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 in the 116SGS231 is set to any one of “1” to “9”, “A”, “B”, and “D” to “F” (116SGS231; N), The checking operation executing flag and the movable body operation checking flag are cleared (116SGS285, 116SGS286), while the origin returning operation executing flag is set (116SGS287). Further, the display of the operation check image on the image display device 5 ends (116SGS288), and the movable body operation check processing ends.

  FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the processing executed by the 116SGS225 of FIG. 22-9 as the movable body operation recheck processing. In the movable body operation re-check process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 is set to “C” (116SGS301). When the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is set to “C” (116SGS301; Y), it is determined whether or not the return path process timer of any movable body is operating (116SGS302).

  When the return process timer of any movable body is not in operation (116SGS302; N), it is further determined whether or not the forward process timer of any movable body is in operation (116SGS303). If the process timer for the forward path of any movable body is not in operation (116SGS303; N), it is further determined whether or not the process timer for returning to the origin of any movable body is in operation (116SGS304). If any of the movable bodies is not in operation of the origin return process timer (116SGS304; N), the movable body to be subjected to the operation check first is specified based on the operation check failure flag (116SGS306).

  In the process of 116SGS306, when the operation check failure flag corresponding to the first movable body 116SG032L is set, the first movable body 116SG032L is specified as an operation check target, and the operation corresponding to the second movable body 116SG032R is performed. If the check failure flag is set, the second movable body 116SG032R is specified as the operation check target. If the operation check failure flag corresponding to the third movable body 116SG032U is set, the third movable body 116SG032U is identified as the operation check target. The movable body 116SG032U is specified, and if the operation check failure flag corresponding to the fourth movable body 116SG032D is set, the fourth movable body 116SG032D is specified as an operation check target. That is, in the characteristic portion 4 of the present embodiment, the operation check (operation recheck) is performed in the order of the first movable body 116SG032L, the second movable body 116SG032R, the third movable body 116032U, and the fourth movable body 116SG032D. It has become.

  In the characteristic part 4 of the present embodiment, an example in which the operation is rechecked in the order of the first movable body 116SG032L, the second movable body 116SG032R, the third movable body 116032U, and the fourth movable body 116SG032D is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The re-check of the operation of a plurality of movable members may be performed simultaneously among these four movable members. The checks may be performed in a different order.

  Next, in 116SGS307, production control CPU 120 clears the operation check failure flag corresponding to the movable body to be checked (116SGS307). Also, whether or not the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body (movable body to be rechecked) specified in 116SGS306 is ON, that is, whether or not the movable body to be rechecked is located at the origin position of the movable body. It is determined whether or not it is (116SGS308). If the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked is OFF (116SGS308; N), an origin return process table (a process for moving the movable body to the origin position) corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked After reading out and setting the table (116SGS309), the originating process timer in the process data 1 of the set originating process table is started, and the process proceeds to 116SGS313 (116SGS310).

  If the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body (movable body to be rechecked) specified in 116SGS306 is ON (116SGS308; Y), the forward path process table (movable body) according to the movable body to be rechecked Is read out and set (116SGS311), the outward process timer in the process data 1 of the outward process table thus set is started, and the process proceeds to 116SGS313 (step S116). 116 SGS 312).

  Then, in 116SGS313, effect control CPU 120 determines the drive motor (recheck target) corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked in accordance with the contents of the first process data of the set process table (origin return process table or forward process table). When the movable body is the first movable body 116SG032L, the drive motor 116SG131a is used. When the movable body to be rechecked is the second movable body 116SG032R, the drive motor 116SG132a is used. When the movable body to be rechecked is the third movable body 116SG032U, the drive is performed. If the motor 116SG133a and the movable body to be rechecked are the fourth movable body 116SG032DL, the drive motor 116SG134a) is driven, and the movable body operation recheck process ends (116SGS313).

  When performing the processing of 116SGS309, 116SGS310, 116SGS313, the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control of moving the movable body toward the origin position by executing the processing of 116SGS315 to 116SGS321 described later. When the processing of 116SGS311 to 116SGS313 is executed, the actual operation confirmation operation control of reciprocating the movable body between the origin position and the rendering position is executed by executing the processing of 116SGS315 to 116SGS321 and 116SGS341 to 116SGS350 described later (FIG. 22-16 and FIG. 22-17).

  Further, when the process timer for returning to the origin is being operated in 116SGS304 (116SGS304; Y), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked is ON (step S116). 116 SGS314). When the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked is ON (116SGS314; Y), the processing of 116SGS311 to 116SGS313 is executed, and when the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked is OFF. (116SGS314; N) decrements the value of the origin return process timer by one (116SGS315). Then, it is determined whether or not the origin return process timer has expired (116SGS316).

  If the origin return process timer has not expired (166SGS316; N), the drive motor corresponding to the movable object to be rechecked is driven according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the origin return process timer, and the movable body is moved. The operation recheck process ends (116SGS317). When the origin return process timer has timed out (116SGS316; Y), it is determined whether the timer-out origin return process timer is the last origin return process timer (116SGS318).

  If the origin-returning process timer that has expired is not the last origin-returning process timer (116SGS318; N), the process data is switched (116SGS319). That is, the process timer for origin return is set to the process timer set value next set in the process table for origin return to restart the process timer for origin return (116SGS320). In addition, the drive motor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked is driven according to the origin return process data set next, and the movable body operation recheck process ends (116SGS321).

  Also, when the last origin return process timer in 116SGS318 expires (116SGS318; Y), it is determined whether or not the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked is ON (116SGS322). When the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked is ON (116SGS322; Y), the operation check result image is updated and displayed (check in the operation check image) in accordance with the origin position sensor being ON. “○” is displayed in the column of the origin position sensor of the target movable body (116SGS323), and the processing of 116SGS311 to 116SGS313 is executed.

  When the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked is OFF (116SGS322; N), the operation check result image is updated and displayed (operation check image) in accordance with the origin position sensor being OFF. ("X" is displayed in the column of the origin position sensor of the movable body to be checked) (116SGS324), and the process proceeds to 116SGS354.

  If the forward process timer is being operated in 116SGS303 (116SGS303; Y), the value of the forward process timer is decremented by 1 (116SGS331), and it is determined whether or not the forward process timer has expired. (116SGS332).

  If the outward process timer has not expired (166SGS332; N), the driving motor corresponding to the movable object to be rechecked is driven in accordance with the contents of the process data corresponding to the outward process timer to restart the movable body operation. The check processing ends (116SGS333). When the outward process timer has expired (116SGS332; Y), it is determined whether or not the outward process timer that has expired is the last outward process timer (116SGS334).

  When the outgoing process timer which has expired is not the last outgoing process timer (116SGS334; N), the process data is switched (116SGS335). That is, the process timer set value set next in the forward process table is set in the forward process timer to restart the forward process timer (116SGS336). Further, the drive motor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked is driven in accordance with the outward process data set next, and the movable body operation recheck process ends (116SGS337).

  If the last outbound process timer has expired in 116SGS334 (116SGS334; Y), it is determined whether or not the effect position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked is ON (116SGS338). When the effect position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked is ON (116SGS338; Y), the operation check result image is updated and displayed (re-display in the operation check image) in accordance with the effect position sensor being ON. “○” is displayed in the field of the effect position sensor of the movable body to be checked) (116SGS339). Then, after reading and setting the return process table (process table for moving the movable body from the presentation position toward the origin position) corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked (116SGS341), the set return process is set. The process timer for the return path in the process data 1 in the table is started (116SGS342). Further, in 116SGS343, effect control CPU 120 drives the drive motor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked according to the contents of the first process data in the set return path process table, and ends the movable body operation recheck processing. (116SGS343).

  When the effect position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked in 116SGS338 is OFF (116SGS338; N), the operation check result image is updated and displayed according to the fact that the effect position sensor is OFF (operation). “×” is displayed in the column of the effect position sensor of the movable body to be rechecked in the check image) (116SGS340), and the process proceeds to 116SGS354.

  Further, when the return process timer is being operated in 116SGS302 (116SGS302; Y), the value of the return process timer is decremented by 1 (116SGS344), and it is determined whether or not the return process timer has expired. (116SGS345).

  If the return process timer has not expired (166SGS345; N), the driving motor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked is driven according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the return process timer to restart the movable body operation. The check processing ends (116SGS346). If the return process timer has expired (116SGS345; Y), it is determined whether or not the return process timer that has expired is the last return process timer (116SGS347).

  When the return-path process timer that has expired is not the last return-path process timer (116SGS347; N), the process data is switched (116SGS348). In other words, the process timer set value set next in the return path process table is set in the return path process timer to restart the return path process timer (116SGS49). In addition, the drive motor is driven in accordance with the movable body to be rechecked in accordance with the return path process data set next, and the movable body operation recheck process ends (116SGS350).

  If the last return process timer has expired in 116SGS347 (116SGS347; Y), it is determined whether or not the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked is ON (116SGS351). If the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked is OFF (116SGS351; N), the operation check result image is updated and displayed (re-display in the operation check image) in accordance with the origin position sensor being OFF. “×” is displayed in the column of the origin position sensor of the movable body to be checked) (116SGS352), and the process proceeds to 116SGS354.

  When the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be rechecked is ON in 116SGS351 (116SGS351; Y), the operation check result image is updated and displayed (operation check image) in accordance with the origin position sensor being ON. Is displayed in the column of the origin position sensor of the movable body to be rechecked (116SGS353) (116SGS353), and the flow proceeds to 116SGS354.

  Then, in 116SGS354, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an operation check failure flag corresponding to any of the movable bodies is set, that is, the movable body whose operation check has not been normally completed in the movable body operation check processing. It is determined whether or not it still remains (116SGS354). If the operation check failure flag corresponding to any of the movable bodies is set (116SGS354; Y), the movable body operation recheck process ends, and the operation check failure flag corresponding to any of the movable bodies is not set. In the case (116SGS354; N), the confirmation operation in progress flag and the body operation recheck flag are cleared (116SGS355, 116SGS356), and the movable body operation recheck process ends.

  If the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 in the 116SGS301 is set to any one of “1” to “9”, “A”, “B”, and “D” to “F” (116SGS301; N), The flag for executing the operation for confirmation and the flag for re-checking the movable body operation are cleared (116SGS357, 116SGS358), while the flag for executing the home position return operation is set (116SGS359). Further, the display of the operation check image on the image display device 5 ends (116SGS460), and the movable body operation re-check process ends.

  FIG. 22-14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed by the 116SGS 230 of FIG. 22-9 as the movable body origin return operation process. In the movable body home position return operation process, first, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not any of the movable body origin return process timers is operating (116SGS361). If any one of the movable bodies is not in operation of the origin return process timer (116SGS361; N), the movable body targeted for the origin return operation is specified based on the setting data stored in the RAM 122 or the like (116SGS362). In the process of 116SGS362, if the return-to-origin operation of any movable body has not yet been performed, the first movable body 116SG032L is specified as the target of the return-to-origin operation, and the return-to-origin operation of the first movable body 116SG032L is performed. Thereafter, the second movable body 116SG032R is specified as the target of the origin return operation. After the execution of the return to origin operation of the second movable body 116SG032R, the third movable body 116SG032U is specified as the target of the return to origin operation, and the third movable body 116SG032U is specified. After execution of the origin return operation, the fourth movable body 116SG032D is specified as the target of the origin return operation. That is, in the characteristic portion 4 of the present embodiment, the origin return operation is performed in the order of the first movable body 116SG032L, the second movable body 116SG032R, the third movable body 116032U, and the fourth movable body 116SG032D. .

  In the characteristic part 4 of the present embodiment, an example in which the origin return operation is performed in the order of the first movable body 116SG032L, the second movable body 116SG032R, the third movable body 116032U, and the fourth movable body 116SG032D is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The origin return operation of a plurality of movable bodies among these four movable bodies may be performed simultaneously, or the origin return operation of each movable body may be performed. The operations may be performed in a different order.

  Next, in 116SGS363, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body (the movable body to be returned to the original point) specified in 116SGS362 is ON, that is, the movable body to be returned to the original point. It is determined whether or not the movable body is located at the origin position (116SGS363). If the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be returned to the origin is OFF (116SGS363; N), after reading and setting the process table for returning to the origin corresponding to the movable body to be returned to the origin (116SGS364), An origin return process timer in process data 1 of the set origin return process table is started (116SGS365). The process table for returning to origin set in 116SGS364 uses the same process table as the process table for returning to origin set in the process of 116SGS238 of the movable body operation check process and in the process of 116SGS309 of the movable body operation recheck process. Is also good.

  Then, in 116SGS366, the effect control CPU 120 drives the drive motor corresponding to the movable body to be returned to the origin in accordance with the contents of the first process data of the set origin return process table to perform the movable body origin return operation processing. The process ends (116SGS366).

  Note that, when performing the processing of 116SGS364 to 116SGS366, the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control of moving the movable body toward the origin position by executing the processing of 116SGS368 to 116SGS374 described later (FIG. 22-16 and FIG. 22-17).

  If the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body specified in 116SGS362 (the movable body to be returned to the origin) is ON (116SGS363; Y), the process proceeds to 116SGS376.

  In addition, when the origin return process timer is being operated in 116SGS361 (116SGS361; Y), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body targeted for the origin return operation is ON. (116SGS367). When the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be returned to the origin is ON (116SGS367; Y), the process proceeds to 116SGS376, and when the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be returned to the origin is OFF (116SGS367; N) decrements the value of the origin return process timer by 1 (116SGS368). Then, it is determined whether or not the origin return process timer has expired (116SGS369).

  If the origin return process timer has not expired (166SGS369; N), the drive motor corresponding to the movable body to be returned to the origin is driven in accordance with the contents of the process data corresponding to the origin return process timer. The body origin return operation processing ends (116SGS370). If the origin return process timer has timed out (116SGS369; Y), it is determined whether the timer-out origin return process timer is the last origin return process timer (116SGS371).

  If the originating process timer for which the timer is out is not the last originating process timer (116SGS371; N), the process data is switched (116SGS372). That is, by setting the process timer set value next set in the origin return process table to the origin return process timer, the origin return process timer is restarted (116SGS373). Further, according to the origin return process data set next, the drive of the drive motor corresponding to the movable body to be subjected to the origin return operation is performed, and the movable body origin return operation processing is terminated (116SGS374).

  If the last origin return process timer has expired in 116SGS 371 (116SGS 371; Y), it is determined whether the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be returned to the origin is ON (116SGS 375). When the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be returned to the origin is ON (116SGS375; Y), the process proceeds to 116SGS376, and when the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be returned to the origin is OFF (116SGS375; N), the movable body origin return operation processing ends.

  Then, in 116SGS376, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a movable body that has not performed the origin return operation (116SGS376). If there is a movable body that has not performed the home position return operation (116SGS376; Y), the movable body home position return operation process ends. If there is no movable body that has not performed the home position return operation (116SGS376; Y), The flag for executing the home position return operation is cleared (116SGS377), and the movable body home position return operation process ends.

  As described above, as shown in FIGS. 22-9 to 22-14, in the characteristic part 4 of the present embodiment, the push button 31B is operated five times after the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 is switched to “C”. The operation check of each movable body and the re-check of the operation of each movable body can be executed, and the operation check of each of the movable bodies and the operation re-check result of each movable body are displayed on the image display device 5 in the operation check It can be confirmed from the result image. In particular, in the operation check result image, the state of the origin position sensor and the effect position sensor corresponding to each movable body, `` O '' indicating that each movable body was normally detected and each movable body was not detected, In other words, since the display indicates that an abnormality has occurred, the clerk at the game hall or the like displays an abnormality in each movable body (each movable body unit) from the display of these “O” and “X”. It is possible to clearly grasp whether or not the occurrence has occurred.

  If the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is changed to a value other than “C” during the operation check or the operation re-check of each movable body, the operation check and the operation re-check of each movable body are interrupted. The movable body moves to a corresponding origin position.

  In the characteristic part 4 of the present embodiment, when the operation check of the movable body is not completed normally in the movable body operation check processing (the movable body was not normally detected by the origin position sensor or the effect position sensor). Case), an example in which the operation check of the movable body (operation re-check) is executed again in the movable body operation re-check processing is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body operation check processing is not limited to this. The operation check of the movable body was performed a plurality of times (for example, three times), and the plurality of operation checks did not end normally (the movable body was correctly detected by the origin position sensor or the staging position sensor in all three operation checks). The movable body operation re-check process may be executed for the movable body under the condition that the movable body is not detected.

  Next, a display mode of the image display device 5 when the channel of the setting change switch 166SG400 is set to “C” will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, as shown in FIG. 22-18 (A), in a state where a decorative design or the like is displayed on the image display device 5, a store clerk or the like of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 3 and operates the setting changeover switch 116SG400. I do. At this time, if the store clerk at the game hall or the like operates the push button 31B five times after setting the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 to “C”, the first movable body 116SG032L, the second movable body 116SG032R, the third movable body 116SG032U, The operation check of each movable body is performed in the order of the fourth movable body 116SG032D.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 22-18 (B) and 22-18 (C), an operation check result image is displayed on the image display device 5, and an origin position sensor or an origin position sensor is provided for each movable body for which the operation check has been completed. “O” or “△” is sequentially entered in the effect position sensor column. That is, it corresponds to the column of the origin position sensor 116SG131b and the effect position sensor 116SG131c corresponding to the first movable member 116SG032L, the column of the origin position sensor 116SG132b and the effect position sensor 116SG132c corresponding to the second movable member 116SG032R, and corresponds to the third movable member 116SG032U. “O” or “△” is written (displayed) in the order of the columns of the origin position sensor 116SG133b and the rendering position sensor 116SG133c, and the columns of the origin position sensor 116SG134b and the rendering position sensor 116SG134c corresponding to the fourth movable body 116SG032D. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22-18 (D), for the movable body in which “△” is displayed in the column of the origin position sensor or the effect position sensor at the time when all the operation checks of the movable bodies are completed, An operation check (operation re-check) is executed, and “O” or “X” is written in the column of the origin position sensor or the effect position sensor corresponding to the movable body subjected to the operation re-check.

  As described above, in the characteristic part 4 of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body operation check processing and the movable body operation re-check processing based on the fact that the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is set to “C”. By doing so, the first movable body 116SG032L, the second movable body 116SG032R, the third movable body 116SG032U, and the fourth movable body 116SG032D are operated, and the first movable body 116SG032D is displayed in the operation check result image displayed on the image display device 5. The column of the origin position sensor 116SG131b and the effect position sensor 116SG131c corresponding to the body 116SG032L, the column of the origin position sensor 116SG132b and the effect position sensor 116SG132c corresponding to the second movable body 116SG032R, and the corresponding to the third movable body 116SG032U. In the order of the origin position sensor 116SG133b and the effect position sensor 116SG133c, and the position of the origin position sensor 116SG134b and the effect position sensor 116SG134c corresponding to the fourth movable body 116SG032D, “○”, “△”, “X”, etc. are displayed in order. Therefore, the clerk at the game hall or the like can recognize which movable body is normally operating by visually checking the operation check result image.

  In addition, in the movable body operation check processing and the movable body operation re-check processing, effect control CPU 120 sequentially operates first movable body 116SG032L, second movable body 116SG032R, third movable body 116SG032U, and fourth movable body 116SG032D. In the operation check result image, “○”, “△”, and “X” are sequentially displayed in the columns of the origin position sensor and the staging position sensor corresponding to the moving body that is operating in the operation check result image. By visually recognizing the operation check result image and the movable body that is operating, the clerk or the like can easily recognize which movable body is currently informed of the operating state.

  Note that, in the characteristic part 4 of the present embodiment, an example in which the operation check result image is sequentially updated according to the detection status of the origin position sensor and the effect position sensor during the operation check of each movable body is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation check result image may be updated only at a specific timing such as the timing when the operation check of all the movable bodies is completed.

  Further, in the movable body operation check processing and the movable body operation re-check processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets the origin position sensor and the origin corresponding to the movable body to be subjected to the operation check when the last set process timer expires. When the position sensor is OFF (when it is determined to be N in the processing of 116SGS251, 116SGS262, and 116SGS281), “△” is displayed in the column of the origin position sensor and the effect position sensor of the movable body to be operation checked in the operation check result image. When the display portion or the origin position sensor or the origin position sensor corresponding to the movable body to be operation-checked is off at the time when the last process timer set in the movable body operation re-check processing has expired (116SGS322, 116SGS338, 116SGS3 In the case where it is determined to be N in the processing of step 1), “×” is displayed in the column of the origin position sensor and the effect position sensor of the movable body to be subjected to the operation check in the operation check result image. By visually recognizing the display of “△” or “×”, it can be quickly and accurately determined that the movable body in operation is not operating normally.

  In the present embodiment, in the movable body operation check processing and the movable body operation re-check processing, when the last set process timer expires, the origin position sensor and the origin corresponding to the movable body to be subjected to the operation check are set. When the position sensor is OFF, the store clerk or the like at the game hall operates by displaying "「 "or" X "in the column of the origin position sensor or effect position sensor of the movable body to be checked for operation in the operation check result image. Although the embodiment in which the movable body in the middle is not operating normally can be determined quickly and accurately, the present invention is not limited to this. The movable body operation check processing and the movable body operation recheck During processing, when the last set process timer expires, the origin position sensor and origin position corresponding to the movable body to be checked When the sensor is OFF, a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the like are used to notify a clerk or the like of the game arcade that the movable body being operated is not operating normally. You may.

  Also, if the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is set to a channel other than “C” during the execution of the movable body operation check processing or the movable body operation recheck processing, the effect control CPU 120 performs the movable body origin return operation processing. Since the execution is performed, all the movable bodies can be reliably located at the origin positions corresponding to the respective movable bodies, regardless of the positions of the respective movable bodies.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays “O”, “△”, “X”, etc. in the columns of the origin position sensor and the effect position sensor corresponding to each movable body in the operation check result image displayed on the image display device 5. Since the display can be performed at the same time, a clerk or the like at the game hall can quickly confirm whether or not the plurality of movable bodies are operating normally.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 4 in the embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention, the present invention will be described. Included in the invention.

  For example, in the characteristic part 4 of the embodiment, the operation check of each movable body can be executed by setting the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 to “C” regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this. In a state where each movable body may operate, such as during a special symbol change display or during a big hit game, the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 is set to “C”. ", The operation check of each movable body may not be executed.

  In the characteristic part 4 of the embodiment, the operation check of each movable body is sequentially performed by setting the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 to “C” while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with power. Although a possible form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 22-19 as a thirteenth modification, a state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (during a power interruption) The channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is set to “C” in advance, and the channel of the setting switch 116SG400 is set to “C” when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (when power is turned on). It may be possible to sequentially execute the operation check of each movable body on condition that the operation is performed. By doing so, even if the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 is set to “C” after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the operation check (and the operation recheck) of each movable body is executed. Can be prevented.

  At the time when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (when the power is turned on), the operation check of each movable body is performed on condition that the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 is set to “C”. When the execution is sequentially possible, the channel of the setting change switch 116SG400 is set to “C”, and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The operation check of each movable body may be sequentially performed based on the push button 31B being operated a predetermined number of times (for example, five times). By doing in this way, even if the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 is erroneously set to “C” when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the operation check of each movable body (and the operation recheck) Are sequentially executed.

  Also, in the characteristic part 4 of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which it is possible to confirm whether or not each movable body operates normally by setting the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 to “C” is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By setting the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 to a channel other than “C”, the data stored in the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 May be executable, such as confirmation of the consistency of the pachinko gaming machine 1, confirmation of whether or not the function specific to the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 operates normally, confirmation of whether or not the effect information is normally backed up in the event of a power failure, and the like. . In the case where an RTC (real-time clock) is mounted on the effect control board 12, by setting the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 to a channel other than “C”, it is determined whether or not the RTC is operating normally. The confirmation may be executable.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a title corresponding to the reach reach of the super reach is displayed from the start of the reach reach of the super reach (the characteristic portion 31AK in FIGS. 1 to 19), the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052. Is operated, any one of a plurality of set values can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By opening and closing the gaming machine frame 109SG003 and the glass door frame 109SG003a, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are set. A mode in which the state can be switched between an operable state and an inoperable state (a characteristic part in FIGS. 20-1 to 20-39), and any one of a plurality of set values for the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the main board 11 (CPU 103). Can be set, and the setting is converted from the set value. Is stored in the RAM 102, and the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) can execute a suggestion effect (Asaichi background effect) indicating the set value (FIG. 20-40 to FIG. 20-). 46, a different command is transmitted from the main board 11 (CPU 103) to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) in accordance with the activated state of the pachinko game machine 1, and the pachinko game machine 1 It is possible to execute a start notification in a different manner between a case where the pachinko game machine is started in a cold start and a case where the pachinko game machine is started in a setting change state, and a form for notifying that the RAM 102 is cleared when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. (Characteristic part 3 of FIGS. 21-1 to 21-27), by setting the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 to “C” A mode in which the movable body is operated and these operation results can be confirmed from the operation check result images on the image display device 5 (the characteristic part 4 in FIGS. 22-1 to 22-19) has been disclosed. May apply a plurality of characteristic parts among these characteristic parts.

  In particular, in the case where the characteristic portion 3 of FIGS. 21-1 to 21-27 and the characteristic portion 4 of FIGS. 22-1 to 22-19 are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting change displayed on the image display device 5 is changed. Priorities may be assigned to related images (for example, the message image 122SG005M1 shown in FIGS. 21 to 25 and the message image 122SG005M3 shown in FIGS. 21 to 27) and the operation check result image. By doing so, when the message image 122SG005M1 or 122SG005M3 with a higher priority is displayed on the image display device 5, the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 is set to “C” and the push button 31B is Even if the operation is performed twice, the operation check result image is displayed on the image display device 5, and it is possible to prevent the display of the message images 122SG005M1 and 122SG005M3 from being interrupted.

  Further, in the case of applying the characteristic part 3 of FIGS. 21-1 to 21-27 and the characteristic part 4 of FIGS. 22-1 to 22-19 in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a set value confirmation process (FIG. 21-12) (See FIG. 21), a set value confirmation image including a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the image display device 5, and a set value change process (see FIG. 21-14) is executed. A setting value change image including a setting value to be set in the device 1 may be displayed on the image display device 5. In the case where the set value confirmation image and the set value change image can be displayed on the image display device 5 in this manner, the priority may be set for the set value confirmation image, the set value change image, and the operation check result image. Good. By doing so, the channel of the setting changeover switch 116SG400 is set to “C” when the setting value confirmation image or the setting value change image with a high priority is displayed on the image display device 5, and the push button 31B Even if is operated five times, the operation check result image is displayed on the image display device 5, and it is possible to prevent the display of the set value confirmation image and the set value change image from being interrupted.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko gaming machine 2 Game board 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 103 CPU
120 Effect control CPU

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A plurality of movable bodies,
Movable body control means capable of individually controlling the operation of the movable body,
An operation unit that can be operated,
Special notification means capable of executing special notification when power is turned on after a specific operation is performed on the operation unit,
With
The special notification means, wherein as a special notification, Ri executable der a verifiable notifying whether each of the movable body is operating normally,
While the special notification is being performed by the special notification unit, the special notification is terminated when a non-specific operation different from the specific operation is performed on the operation unit, while all the movable bodies are Perform initial operation to position at initial position
A gaming machine characterized by that:   The special notification means performs, as the special notification, a display for sequentially operating each of the movable bodies in a predetermined manner and confirming whether or not each of the movable bodies is operating normally.
  The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein:

Images